Mercedes Benz Automobile 2001 M Class User Manual

M-class  
Operator’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.  
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire  
to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.  
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of  
ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:  
Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for  
your reference.  
Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the  
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.  
Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety  
of the vehicle operator and occupants.  
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.  
DaimlerChrysler AG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors ................................................. 30 Supplemental restraint  
Introduction  
system (SRS) ................................54  
Emergency tensioning  
retractor (ETR) .............................55  
Airbags ..............................................56  
Safety guidelines for the  
seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor  
and airbag .....................................63  
Infant and child  
restraint systems ..........................65  
Adjustable steering wheel ..............70  
Inside rear view mirror .................. 71  
Antiglare night position .............. 71  
Exterior rear view mirrors .............73  
Exterior rear view mirror,  
electrically folding .......................75  
Instrument cluster ........................... 76  
Indicator lamps in the  
instrument cluster ......................78  
Trip computer ...................................83  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........87  
Engine oil level indicator ................89  
Exterior lamp switch .......................90  
Central locking switch .................... 32  
Automatic central locking .......... 32  
Emergency unlocking in case  
of accident ................................... 33  
Liftgate .............................................. 34  
Antitheft alarm system ................... 35  
Tow-away alarm and  
glass breakage sensor ............... 36  
Seats, front ....................................... 37  
Manual seats ................................ 39  
Power seats ................................... 40  
Head restraint ...............................41  
Heated seats ..................................... 44  
Seat belts and integrated  
restraint system .......................... 46  
Seat belts .......................................... 46  
Seat belt nonusage  
Product information .......................... 7  
Roadside assistance ......................... 10  
Where to find it ................................ 14  
Reporting Safety Defects ................ 16  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls ............... 18  
Center console ..............................20  
Overhead control panel ...............21  
Operation  
Vehicle keys ......................................24  
Start lock-out ....................................25  
General notes on the  
central locking system ...............26  
Central locking system ...................26  
Radio frequency  
remote control ..............................26  
Unlocking the liftgate ..................28  
Panic button ..................................28  
Mechanical keys ...........................29  
warning system ............................ 47  
BabySmartTM airbag  
deactivation system ................... 53  
Self-test BabySmartTM  
without special child  
seat installed ................................ 53  
Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
2
Fog lamp switch  
(except Canada) ...........................92  
Fog lamp switch  
Illuminated vanity mirrors ...........113  
Interior .............................................114  
Storage compartments,  
armrest and cup holder ............114  
Glove box ......................................115  
Armrest in rear bench seat ...........117  
Ashtrays ...........................................118  
Lighter .............................................. 119  
Split rear seat bench ..................... 120  
Easy entry/exit feature ............. 123  
Rear seat head restraints ......... 124  
Third row seats .............................. 126  
Removable cargo floor plates ...... 129  
Enlarged cargo area .......................131  
Cargo tie-down rings .....................132  
Hooks ...............................................133  
Partition net ....................................133  
Loading instructions ......................136  
Cargo area cover blind ..................137  
Telephone, general .........................139  
Cellular telephone ..........................139  
Garage door opener ....................... 140  
Driving  
Control and operation of  
radio transmitters .....................146  
The first 1 000 miles  
(Canada only) ..............................93  
Hazard warning flasher  
switch ............................................94  
Headlamp cleaning system ............94  
Windshield wiper/washer  
switch ............................................95  
Rear window wiper/washer ...........96  
Climate control .................................98  
Basic setting – Heater ...............100  
Basic setting –  
Air conditioner ...........................100  
Special setting ............................ 101  
Dust filter ....................................102  
Air recirculation .........................102  
Rear window defroster ..............103  
Power windows ...............................104  
(1 500 km) .................................147  
Maintenance ...................................147  
Tele Aid ...........................................148  
Catalytic converter ........................160  
Emission control ............................ 161  
Steering lock ...................................162  
Starting and turning off  
the engine ..................................164  
Automatic transmission ...............165  
Parking brake .................................173  
Driving instructions ...................... 174  
Drive sensibly – save fuel ......... 174  
Drinking and driving ................. 174  
Pedals ........................................... 174  
Power assistance ........................175  
Brakes ..........................................175  
Rear quarter windows ...................106  
Sliding/pop-up roof .......................107  
Skyview Top ....................................109  
Interior lighting ..............................110  
Sun visors ........................................113  
Driving off ................................... 176  
Parking ........................................ 176  
Tires .............................................177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Snow chains ................................179  
Winter driving instructions ......180  
Deep water .................................. 181  
Passenger compartment ...........182  
Traveling abroad ........................182  
Off-Road driving .............................183  
Trailer towing ................................. 190  
Cruise control ................................. 196  
Brake assist system (BAS) ............ 199  
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......201  
Four-wheel electronic  
Adjustable steering wheel –  
indicator lamp .............................222  
AIRBAG OFF  
indicator lamp .............................222  
Seat belt warning lamp .............223  
Charge indicator lamp ...............223  
Low engine oil level  
warning lamp ..............................224  
Low engine coolant  
level warning ..............................224  
Brake pad wear  
indicator lamp .............................225  
Instrument cluster display  
Malfunction and indicator  
lamps in the  
instrument cluster .....................218  
On-board diagnostic system –  
Check engine malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................218  
Brake warning lamp ...................219  
Supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) indicator lamp ..................219  
Fuel reserve warning ................220  
Electronic stability  
traction system (4-ETS+) ..........203  
Electronic brake  
proportioning (EBP) ..................204  
Electronic stability program  
FSS indicator ...............................225  
program (ESP) / Electronic  
traction system (ETS) –  
warning lamp ............................. 221  
(ESP) ...........................................205  
BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 221  
4-ETS malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 221  
Transmission control –  
LOW RANGE mode ...................209  
What you should know  
at the gas station .......................212  
LOW RANGE  
indicator lamp ............................ 221  
Check regularly and  
before a long trip ....................... 215  
ABS malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 222  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
Vehicle jack, wheel bolt  
Exterior lamps ................................260  
Headlamp assembly ...................261  
Taillamp assemblies ..................265  
Adjusting headlamp aim ...............268  
Remote control  
battery replacement .................270  
Synchronizing  
remote control ............................271  
Emergency operation of  
sliding/pop-up roof ...................272  
Emergency operation of  
Skyview Top ...............................273  
Manual release for  
fuel filler flap .............................274  
Replacing wiper blades .................275  
Roof rack ......................................... 276  
Practical hints  
wrench and screwdriver ......... 237  
Air pump .........................................239  
Wheels ............................................240  
Tire replacement .......................240  
Rotating wheels ......................... 241  
Spare wheel ....................................242  
Changing wheels ...........................245  
Tire inflation pressure ................. 250  
Battery ............................................. 251  
Jump starting ................................. 253  
Towing the vehicle ........................ 255  
Transmission selector lever,  
First aid kit .....................................228  
Fuses ................................................228  
Electrical outlet ..............................230  
Stowing things in the vehicle ......230  
Hood .................................................231  
Checking engine oil level .............233  
Automatic transmission  
fluid level ...................................234  
Engine oil consumption ................234  
Coolant level ...................................234  
Adding coolant ...........................235  
Windshield washer/headlamp  
manually unlocking ..................259  
Stranded vehicle ............................ 259  
cleaning system .........................236  
Windshield and  
headlamp washer fluid  
mixing ratio ................................237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cup holder ..................................282 Brake fluid ......................................294  
Seat belts .....................................282 Premium unleaded gasoline ........295  
Headliner ....................................282 Fuel requirements .........................295  
Upholstery ..................................282 Gasoline additives .........................296  
Hard plastic trim items .............282 Coolants ...........................................296  
Plastic and rubber parts ...........282 Consumer information ..................298  
Vehicle care  
Cleaning and care  
of the vehicle .............................278  
Power washer ..............................279  
Tar stains .....................................279  
Paintwork, painted body  
components .................................279  
Engine cleaning ..........................280  
Vehicle washing .........................280  
Ornamental moldings ................280  
Headlamps, taillamps,  
turn signal lenses ......................280  
Window cleaning ........................281  
Wiper blades ...............................281  
Light alloy wheels ......................281  
Instrument cluster .....................281  
Steering wheel and  
Technical data  
Index  
Spare parts service .......................284 Index ................................................300  
Warranty coverage ........................ 284  
Identification labels ......................285  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ...........286  
Technical data ................................287  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants  
etc. – capacities ........................ 292  
Engine oils ...................................... 294  
Engine oil additives ......................294  
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........294  
gear selector lever ......................281  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product information  
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:  
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories  
explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.  
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special  
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.  
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible  
for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other  
agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,  
performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.  
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available  
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on  
permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.  
Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
8
Operator’s manual  
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize  
yourself with the vehicle before driving.  
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings  
contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.  
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations  
for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment,  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.  
Service and warranty information  
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your  
Mercedes-Benz, including:  
New Light Truck Limited Warranty,  
Emission System Warranty,  
Emission Performance Warranty,  
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty  
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),  
State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles  
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price, if  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC or its authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fails to conform the vehicle to its express warranties  
after a reasonable number of repair attempts during the period of one year or 12 000 miles from original delivery of  
the vehicle. A reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer (1) if the vehicle is out of service by  
reason of repair of substantial nonconformities for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days or (2) the same  
substantial non-conformity has been subject to repair four or more times and you have at least once directly  
notified us in writing of the need to repair the non-conformity and have given us an opportunity to perform the  
repair ourselves. Notifications should be sent to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Regional Office listed in the  
Service and Warranty Information Booklet.  
Maintenance  
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.  
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.  
Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
10  
Roadside assistance  
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown.  
Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)  
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)  
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
Roadside assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guidelines which include providing service  
to the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a paved roadway. We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown  
situation, however, the accessibility of your vehicle will be determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center technician or the tow service provider on a case by case basis and may be a factor in our ability to respond.  
Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to be a reasonably accessible roadside  
location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider.  
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change of address or ownership  
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty  
Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can  
contact you should the need arise.  
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.  
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and  
Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:  
Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,  
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage  
the catalysts,  
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.  
Introduction  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
12  
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make  
changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual  
might differ from your vehicle.  
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they  
are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your  
vehicle.  
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.  
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning!  
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for  
which conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars were not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver  
differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which may occur on streets, highways and  
off-road use.  
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with  
other vehicles of this type, if you make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may  
roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,  
and severe or fatal injury.  
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the  
driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your  
vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt  
maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or  
working the vehicle, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an  
unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.  
Introduction  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
14  
Where to find it  
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:  
• Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.  
• Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation.  
• Driving: Important information on driving.  
• Instrument cluster display: Indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions.  
• Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency.  
• Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.  
• Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels,  
coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.  
• Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.  
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment.  
Explanation of color used:  
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and  
others appear on red background.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problems with your vehicle  
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect  
its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to  
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center  
management, or if necessary contact us at the following addresses:  
In the USA: Client Assistance Center  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC  
One Mercedes Drive  
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350  
In Canada:  
Customer Relations Department  
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.  
849 Eglinton Avenue East  
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5  
Introduction  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
16  
For the USA only:  
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,  
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  
Reporting Safety Defects  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety  
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA  
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393  
(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,  
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls ............... 18  
Center console ..............................20  
Overhead control panel ...............21  
Contents - Instruments and controls  
17  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For more detailed descriptions see index on page 300.  
14 Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode, see  
page 209  
For adjustment of air outlets, refer to climate control,  
see page 98.  
15 Indicator lamp for antitheft alarm system  
16 Auxiliary front fog lamp/rear fog lamp switch, see  
1 Cup holder, see page 114  
page 92  
2 Parking brake release, see page 173  
3 Parking brake pedal, see page 173  
4 Steering wheel adjustment lever, see page 70  
5 Headlamp washer switch, see page 94  
6 Exterior lamp switch, see page 90  
7 Cruise control switch, see page 196  
8 Instrument cluster, see page 76  
17 MCS (Optional Modular Control System), see  
separate operator’s manual  
18 Front passenger airbag, see page 56  
19 Glove box (illuminated with key in steering lock  
position 1 or 2)  
20 Cup holder, see page 114  
21 Storage compartment  
22 Air recirculation switch, see page 98  
23 Air conditioner on/off switch, see page 98  
24 Air volume control switch  
9 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 94  
10 Horn (with key in steering lock position 1 or 2),  
Driver airbag, see page 56  
11 Steering lock with ignition/starter switch, see  
25 Temperature selector switch  
26 Air distribution switch  
page 162  
12 Switch for exterior rear view mirrors, electrically  
27 Electrical outlet, see page 230  
folding, see page 75  
13 Windshield wiper/washer switch, see page 95  
Instruments and controls  
19  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Center console  
20  
1 Left front seat heater switch, see page 44  
2 Switch for rear quarter window, left, see page 106  
3 Switch for rear window washer/wiper, see page 96  
4 ESP control switch, see page 207  
5 Switch for rear quarter window, right, see page 106  
6 Right front seat heater switch, see page 44  
7 Storage compartment  
8 Selector lever, see page 165  
9 Ashtray with lighter, see page 118  
10 Power window switch, left front door, see page 104  
11 Central locking switch, see page 32  
12 Rear window defroster switch, see page 103  
13 Power window switch, right front door, see page 104  
14 Power window switch, left rear door, see page 104  
15 Mirror adjustment switch, see page 73  
16 Power window safety switch, rear doors, see  
page 104  
17 Power window switch, right rear door, see page 104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overhead control panel  
1 Interior lighting, see page 110  
2 Garage door opener, see page 140  
3 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid, telephone and  
voice recognition system  
4 Tele Aid (emergency call system), see page 148  
5 Sliding/pop-up roof, see page 107  
1
Skyview Top, see page 109  
2
1
6 Rear view mirror, see page 71  
3
Reading lamps inside rear view mirror, see page 110  
4
5
6
Instruments and controls  
21  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Contents - Operation  
22  
Head restraint ...............................41  
Antiglare night position .............. 71  
Heated seats ..................................... 44 Exterior rear view mirrors .............73  
Operation  
Vehicle keys ......................................24  
Start lock-out ....................................25  
General notes on the  
central locking system ...............26  
Central locking system ...................26  
Radio frequency  
remote control ..............................26  
Unlocking the liftgate ..................28  
Panic button ..................................28  
Mechanical keys ...........................29  
Doors ..................................................30  
Central locking switch ....................32  
Automatic central locking ..........32  
Emergency unlocking in case  
of accident ....................................33  
Liftgate ...............................................34  
Antitheft alarm system ...................35  
Tow-away alarm and  
Seat belts and integrated  
restraint system .......................... 46  
Seat belts .......................................... 46 Instrument cluster ........................... 76  
Exterior rear view mirror,  
electrically folding .......................75  
Seat belt nonusage  
Indicator lamps in the  
warning system ............................ 47  
instrument cluster ......................78  
Trip computer ...................................83  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........87  
Engine oil level indicator ................89  
Exterior lamp switch .......................90  
Fog lamp switch  
(except Canada) ..........................92  
Fog lamp switch  
(Canada only) ..............................93  
Hazard warning flasher  
switch ............................................94  
Headlamp cleaning system ............94  
Windshield wiper/washer  
switch ............................................95  
Rear window wiper/washer ...........96  
Climate control .................................98  
BabySmartTM airbag  
deactivation system ................... 53  
Self-test BabySmartTM  
without special child  
seat installed ................................ 53  
Supplemental restraint  
system (SRS) ............................... 54  
Emergency tensioning  
retractor (ETR) ............................ 55  
Airbags .............................................. 56  
Safety guidelines for the  
seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor  
and airbag ..................................... 63  
Infant and child  
restraint systems ......................... 65  
Adjustable steering wheel .............. 70  
Inside rear view mirror ...................71  
glass breakage sensor ................36  
Seats, front ........................................37  
Manual seats .................................39  
Power seats ...................................40  
Basic setting – Heater ...............100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic setting –  
Illuminated vanity mirrors ...........113 Removable cargo floor plates .......129  
Interior .............................................114 Enlarged cargo area ....................... 131  
Air conditioner ...........................100  
Special setting ............................ 101  
Dust filter ....................................102  
Air recirculation .........................102  
Rear window defroster ..............103 Armrest in rear bench seat ...........117  
Power windows ...............................104 Ashtrays ...........................................118  
Rear quarter windows ...................106 Lighter .............................................. 119  
Sliding/pop-up roof .......................107 Split rear seat bench ..................... 120  
Storage compartments,  
Cargo tie-down rings .....................132  
Hooks ...............................................133  
Partition net ....................................133  
Loading instructions .....................136  
Cargo area cover blind ..................137  
Telephone, general ........................139  
Cellular telephone .........................139  
Garage door opener .......................140  
armrest and cup holder ............114  
Glove box ......................................115  
Skyview Top ....................................109  
Interior lighting ..............................110  
Easy entry/exit feature ............. 123  
Rear seat head restraints ......... 124  
Sun visors ........................................113 Third row seats .............................. 126  
Contents - Operation  
23  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Vehicle keys  
24  
Remote control with folding master key  
Included with your vehicle are:  
2 remote controls with folding master keys,  
1 reserve key,  
1
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do  
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or  
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised  
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious  
personal injury.  
The remote control operates all locks on the vehicle.  
To release the key, press button (1). The key unfolds  
from the holder by itself.  
The transmitter for the remote control is located in the  
key holder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reserve key  
Obtaining replacement keys  
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking  
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.  
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be  
obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center.  
Start lock-out  
Important!  
Removing the key from the steering lock activates the  
start lock-out. The engine cannot be started.  
Turning the key in the steering lock to position 2  
deactivates the start lock-out.  
The reserve key fits all locks on the vehicle.  
Note:  
For notes on the mechanical keys refer to page 29.  
In case the engine cannot be started and the  
messages Á and î are shown in the odometer  
display field, the system is not operational. Contact an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100  
(in Canada).  
Note:  
We recommend that you carry the reserve key with you  
and keep it in a safe place (e.g. your wallet) so that it is  
always handy. Never leave the reserve key in the  
vehicle.  
Central locking system  
25  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
26  
General notes on the central locking system  
Central locking system  
If the key in the steering lock is in position 1 or 2, the  
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote  
control.  
(Radio frequency remote control)  
The master key has an integrated radio frequency  
remote control.  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:  
Check the batteries of the remote control, see  
Due to the extended operational range of the remote  
control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or  
unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button.  
page 270.  
Synchronize the remote control, see page 271.  
The vehicle doors, liftgate and fuel filler flap can be  
centrally locked and unlocked via remote control.  
With vehicle centrally locked, the liftgate can also be  
unlocked by using the remote control.  
If the key in the steering lock is in position 1 or 2, the  
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote  
control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking and unlocking with remote control  
Unlocking:  
Press transmit button Œ once. All turn signal lamps  
blink once to indicate that the driver’s door and fuel  
filler flap are unlocked.  
The antitheft alarm system is also deactivated.  
Press transmit button Œ a second time to unlock  
remaining doors and liftgate.  
Notes:  
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 274.  
1 Transmit button  
Locking  
If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote  
control, neither door nor liftgate is opened or the key is  
not inserted in the steering lock, the vehicle will  
automatically lock and reactivate the antitheft alarm  
system.  
Œ Unlocking  
Š Unlocking liftgate  
2 PANIC button  
3 Release button for master key  
Central locking system  
27  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Panic button  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
28  
Locking:  
Press transmit button once. All turn signal lamps  
blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked  
and the antitheft alarm is activated.  
Notes:  
If the turn signal lamps do not blink three times when  
locking the vehicle, a door, the liftgate, or the hood is  
not properly closed. Close the respective element and  
lock the vehicle again with the remote control.  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing  
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change  
the batteries in the remote control or to synchronize the  
remote control, see page 270 and page 271.  
To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one  
second. An audible alarm and blinking turn signal  
lamps will operate for approximately 3 minutes.  
Additionally the interior lights switch on automatically  
for approximately 3 minutes.  
Unlocking the liftgate  
Press transmit button Š to unlock the liftgate. This  
also deactivates the antitheft alarm.  
To deactivate press button (1) again, or press transmit  
button , Œ or Š on the remote control, or  
turn key in steering lock to position 1.  
Important!  
A minimum height clearance of 7 ft. (2.15 m) is  
required to open the liftgate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Mechanical keys  
For operation in the USA only: This device complies  
with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
The mechanical keys fit all locks on the vehicle.  
Notes:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
Use of the key does not operate the central locking  
system or arm or disarm the antitheft alarm system.  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
The alarm sounds when unlocking the door. Cancel  
alarm by turning key in steering lock to position 1, or  
with the remote control by pressing button Œ.  
WARNING: Changes or modification not expressly  
approved by party responsible for compliance could void  
the users’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Central locking system  
29  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Doors  
30  
P72.10-2103-26  
1 Opening – pull handle  
5 Front door from inside:  
Pull handle to unlock.  
2 Unlocking driver’s door lock  
3 Locking driver’s door lock  
Important!  
4 Individual door from inside:  
Push lock button down to lock.  
Pull lock button up to unlock.  
The mechanical key does not operate the central locking  
system or arm or disarm the antitheft alarm system.  
When you lock the driver’s door with the mechanical  
key, the door lock button should move down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each individual door and the liftgate must be locked  
with the respective door lock button – the driver’s door  
can only be locked when it is closed.  
To lock, push down lock buttons and turn mechanical  
key in driver’s door lock to position 3. In addition lock  
the liftgate.  
To unlock, pull inside door handles and turn mechanical  
key in driver’s door lock to position 2.  
Notes:  
The alarm sounds when unlocking the driver’s door.  
Cancel alarm by turning key in steering lock to  
position 1, or with the remote control by pressing  
button Œ.  
Rear doors, previously centrally locked, can be opened  
from inside by first unlocking the vehicle with the  
central locking switch, see page 32, or by first pulling  
up the door lock button.  
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the  
outside, only the door being opened from the inside will  
unlock, and the alarm will come on. The remaining  
doors, the liftgate and fuel filler flap remain locked.  
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 274.  
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  
the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.  
Central locking system  
31  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Central locking switch  
32  
Automatic central locking  
The central locking switch also operates the automatic  
central locking.  
With the automatic central locking system activated and  
the engine running, the doors and trunk are locked at  
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or  
more.  
To activate:  
With key in steering lock position 2 hold upper portion  
of switch (1) for a minimum of 5 seconds.  
To deactivate:  
With key in steering lock position 2 hold lower portion  
of switch (2) for a minimum of 5 seconds.  
1 Locking  
2 Unlocking  
The central locking switch is located on the center  
console.  
The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central  
locking switch, if the front doors are closed.  
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote  
control, the doors and liftgate cannot be unlocked with  
the central locking switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Emergency unlocking in case of accident  
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch  
after activating the automatic central locking, and  
neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked  
even at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph  
(15 km/h) or more.  
The doors unlock automatically a short time after an  
accident in which an airbag or emergency tensioning  
retractor deploys (this is intended to aid rescue and  
exit). However, the key must still be in the steering lock  
position 1 or 2.  
If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of  
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the  
automatic central locking activated, the door will again  
be automatically locked at speeds of approximately  
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.  
Additionally the hazard warning flashers turn on  
automatically and the interior lights switch on for  
approximately 30 minutes.  
Important!  
When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a  
dynamometer test stand, please, note the following:  
With the engine running, the vehicle doors will lock if  
the left front wheel spins at vehicle speeds of  
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.  
To prevent vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate  
the automatic central locking.  
Central locking system  
33  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Liftgate  
34  
1 Grip molding  
1 Handle, inside  
2 Locking  
2 Handle, outside  
3 Recessed grip  
3 Unlocking  
To open:  
Important!  
From outside of vehicle, pull on handle (2).  
In case of danger, the unlocked liftgate can be opened  
with the inside or outside handle.  
To close:  
Pull down on recessed grip (3), and close by using the  
grip molding (1).  
Only drive with the liftgate closed as otherwise exhaust  
fumes may enter the vehicle interior.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Antitheft alarm system  
Operation:  
The indicator lamp is located in the center console.  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the turn signal  
lamps will flash rapidly (approximately 3 minutes) and  
the horn will sound intermittently (approximately  
30 seconds) when someone:  
The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed  
with the remote control by locking or unlocking the  
vehicle.  
opens a door,  
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately  
15 seconds after locking the vehicle with the remote  
control.  
opens the liftgate,  
opens the hood,  
A blinking lamp in the center console indicates that the  
alarm is armed.  
breaks a window,  
attempts to raise the vehicle.  
Notes:  
The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a  
door, for example) is immediately closed.  
Use of the key in the front door locks does not arm or  
disarm the antitheft alarm system.  
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an  
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid  
on page 148.  
The alarm sounds when unlocking the driver’s door  
with the mechanical key. Cancel alarm by turning key in  
steering lock to position 1, or with the remote control by  
pressing button Œ.  
Note:  
If the vehicle battery voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
alarm is automatically canceled and the antitheft alarm  
system is disarmed. When the voltage is above this  
value again, the antitheft alarm system is armed again.  
The alarm system will cycle three times when triggered.  
The interior lights are automatically switched on when  
the alarm comes on and go out when canceling the  
alarm.  
Antitheft alarm system  
35  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tow-away protection  
36  
Tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor  
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in the form  
of rapidly flashing turn signal lamps. At the same time  
the horn will sound for approximately 30 seconds. The  
alarm will stay on even if the vehicle is immediately  
lowered.  
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an  
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid  
on page 148.  
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch  
off the tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor before  
towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject  
to movement, such as a ferry or auto train.  
To do so, turn key in steering lock to position 1, then  
return it to position 0 and remove key from steering  
lock.  
The switch is located in the overhead console.  
Within 30 seconds, push left or right button. (On  
vehicles equipped with optional trip computer, push  
RESET or MODE button, display shows OFF.)  
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor are part  
of the antitheft alarm system.  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the turn signal  
lamps will flash rapidly and the horn will sound when  
someone attempts to raise the vehicle, or breaks a  
window and reaches into the passenger compartment.  
Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with remote control.  
The tow-away alarm and glass breakage sensor remain  
switched off until the key is inserted in steering lock  
and turned to position 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seats, front  
Warning!  
Warning!  
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.  
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the  
driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle.  
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or  
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised  
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious  
personal injury.  
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest  
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position  
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat  
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt  
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That  
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The  
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint  
when the wearer is in an upright position and the  
belt is properly positioned on the body.  
Caution!  
Do not remove head restraints except when mounting  
seat covers. For removal see page 43. Whenever head  
restraints have been removed be sure to reinstall them  
before driving.  
Never place hands under seat or near any moving  
parts while a seat is being adjusted.  
Seats  
37  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
38  
Important!  
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should adjust  
the seat height for proper vision as well as fore/aft  
placement and backrest angle to insure adequate  
control, reach, operation, and comfort. The head  
restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See  
also airbag section on page 56 for proper seat  
positioning.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz  
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,  
which operates with the BabySmartTM system  
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  
side front airbag when it is properly installed.  
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal  
injury can result.  
In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure  
adequate control, reach, operation, and comfort.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer  
when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
Infants and small children must ride in the back  
seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or  
child restraint system, which is properly secured  
with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance  
with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.  
Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be  
adjusted for adequate rearward vision.  
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be  
seated in a properly secured restraint system that  
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view  
mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts  
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual seats (ML 320)  
2 Seat cushion inclination adjustment  
Raise lever (2), move seat cushion to desired  
position. Release lever.  
3 Backrest adjustment  
Turn handwheel (3).  
4 Head restraint height  
Raising:  
Pull up on head restraint.  
Lowering:  
Push button (4), located at top of seat back, and  
push down on head restraint.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head  
approximately at ear level. The head restraint angle  
can also be adjusted manually.  
We recommend to adjust the manual seat in the  
following order:  
See page 43 for removing head restraints.  
1 Seat, fore/aft  
Lift handle (1), slide seat to desired position and  
allow handle to reengage. Check for proper  
engagement before driving. The position should be  
as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to  
properly operate controls.  
Seats  
39  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
40  
Power seats (standard; optional on model ML 320)  
We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following  
order:  
1 Seat, up/down  
Press the switch (up/down direction) until  
comfortable seating position with still sufficient  
headroom is reached.  
2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft  
Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a  
comfortable seating position is reached that still  
allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal  
safely. The position should be as far rearward as  
possible, consistent with ability to properly operate  
controls.  
3 Seat cushion tilt  
The slide switches are located on the entry side of each  
front seat base.  
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  
your legs are lightly supported.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2 (with the  
driver’s or passenger’s door open, the power seats can  
also be operated with the key removed or in steering  
lock position 0).  
4 Backrest tilt  
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  
your arms are slightly angled when holding the  
steering wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Only minor personal adjustments, as described below,  
should then be required.  
Head restraint  
For exterior rear view mirrors, see page 73;  
inside rear view mirror, see page 71;  
steering wheel adjustment, see page 70.  
Note:  
See page 42 for instructions on storing and recalling the  
seat position.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle.  
The power seats can also be operated with the  
driver’s or passenger door open. Do not leave  
children unattended in the vehicle or with access  
to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle  
equipment may cause serious personal injury.  
Raising:  
Pull up on head restraint.  
Lowering:  
Push button, located at top of seat back, and push down  
on head restraint, see also page 43.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head  
approximately at ear level. The head restraint angle can  
also be adjusted manually.  
See page 43 for removing head restraints.  
Seats  
41  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Storing  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
42  
Memory storing and recalling  
(optional on model ML 320 and ML 430)  
Three sets of seat positions may be programmed into  
memory. After the seat is positioned, push memory  
button (5), release, and within 3 seconds push position  
button “1”. A second and third set of positions for the  
same seat can be programmed into memory by pushing  
first memory button (5) and then position button “2”,  
respectively “3”.  
Recalling  
To recall a seat position, push and hold one of the  
position buttons “1”, “2” or “3” until seat movement has  
stopped. The seat movement stops when the respective  
position button is released.  
Caution!  
5 Memory button  
Do not operate the power seats using the memory  
button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined  
position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear  
seats.  
6 Position buttons  
First move the backrest to an upright position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Head restraint removal  
Ensure proper head restraint positioning, see above.  
Warning!  
For your protection, drive only with properly  
positioned head restraints.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the  
head approximately at ear level.  
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head  
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help  
reduce injuries during an accident.  
Removal:  
Pull head restraint to its highest position. Push lock  
button (arrow) and pull out head restraint completely  
with both hands.  
Installation:  
Insert the head restraint and push it down to the stop.  
Push lock button (arrow) and adjust head restraint down  
to the desired position.  
Seats  
43  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
44  
Heated seats (front, optional on ML 320)  
Press switch to turn on seat heater:  
1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in  
the switch lights up.  
2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in  
1
the switch light up.  
After approximately 5 minutes in the rapid seat  
heating mode, the seat heater automatically  
switches to normal operation and only one indicator  
lamp will stay on.  
2
Turning off seat heater:  
If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch.  
P54.25-2036-26  
If both indicator lamps are on, press lower half of  
switch.  
The front seat heater switches are located on the center  
console.  
If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after  
approximately 20 minutes of operation.  
The front seat heaters can be switched on with the  
engine running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large  
amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the  
seat heater longer than necessary.  
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too  
many power consumers are switched on at the same  
time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,  
the indicator lamps in the switch will blink for  
approximately 30 seconds.  
Within this time the seat heaters will switch on again  
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.  
After approximately 30 seconds without sufficient  
voltage the seat heaters switch off (indicator lamps go  
out).  
Seats  
45  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
46  
Seat belts and integrated restraint system  
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats,  
emergency tensioning retractors for front and second  
row outboard seat belts, dual front airbags and door  
mounted side impact airbags. Their protective functions  
are designed to complement one another.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz  
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,  
which operates with the BabySmartTM system  
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  
side front airbag when it is properly installed.  
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal  
injury will result.  
Seat belts  
Important!  
According to accident statistics, children are safer  
when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
Infants and small children must ride in back seats  
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child  
restraint system, which is properly secured with  
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the  
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.  
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require  
seat belt use.  
All states and provinces require use of child restraints  
that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in  
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-  
shoulder belt.  
For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly  
recommend their use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning!  
Warning!  
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest  
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position  
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat  
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt  
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That  
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The  
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint  
when the wearer is in an upright position and the  
belt is properly positioned on the body.  
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position  
your seat belt greatly increases your risk of  
injuries and their likely severity in an accident.  
You and your passengers should always wear seat  
belts.  
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be  
considerably more severe without your seat belt  
properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled,  
you are much more likely to hit the interior of the  
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously  
injured or killed.  
Note:  
For cleaning and care of the seat belts, see page 282.  
In the same crash, the possibility for injury or  
death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt.  
Seat belt nonusage warning system  
Warning!  
After starting the engine, a warning sounds and the seat  
belt warning lamp < remains illuminated for a short  
time if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.  
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there  
are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in  
the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate  
seat belt.  
Restraint systems  
47  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
48  
Fastening of seat belts  
Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks. Do not  
twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause injury.  
To help avoid severe or fatal injuries, the lap belt must  
be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not  
across the abdomen.  
Warning!  
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.  
Always make sure your passengers are properly  
restrained – even those sitting in the rear.  
1 Latch plate  
2 Buckle  
3 Release button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Button for belt outlet height adjustment  
Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder  
portion up.  
To raise, slide belt height adjustment upward.  
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled  
snug and checked for snugness immediately after  
engaging it.  
To lower, press button (4) and slide belt outlet  
downward.  
Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as  
close as possible to the middle of your shoulder (it  
should not touch the neck). For this purpose, you can  
adjust the height of the belt outlet. Three positions are  
available.  
Caution!  
For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or backrest  
into positions which could affect the correct seat belt  
positioning.  
Restraint systems  
49  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
50  
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY.  
• Seat belts can only work when used properly.  
Never wear seat belts in any other way than as  
described in this section, as that could result  
in serious injuries in case of an accident.  
• Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all  
times, because seat belts help reduce the  
likelihood of and potential severity of injuries  
in accidents, including rollovers. The  
integrated restraint system includes “SRS”  
(driver airbag, front passenger airbag, front  
and rear door mounted side impact airbags),  
“ETR” (seat belt emergency tensioning  
retractors for the outboard passenger seats  
[except in the optional 3rd row seats]), and  
front seat knee bolsters. The system is  
designed to enhance the protection offered to  
properly belted occupants in certain frontal  
(front airbags) and side (side impact airbags)  
impacts which exceed preset deployment  
thresholds.  
Operation  
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during  
sudden vehicle stops or when quickly pulling on the  
belt. The locking function of the reel may be checked by  
quickly pulling out the belt.  
Unfastening of seat belts  
Push the release button (3) in the belt buckle (2).  
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by  
guiding the latch plate (1).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm,  
against your neck or off your shoulder. In a  
crash, your body would move too far forward.  
That would increase the chance of head and  
neck injuries. The belt would also apply too  
much force to the ribs or abdomen, which  
could severely injure internal organs such as  
your liver or spleen.  
• Each seat belt should never be used for more  
than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat  
belt around a person and another person or  
other objects.  
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash,  
you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to  
manage impact forces. The twisted belt against  
your body could cause injuries.  
• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable  
objects in or on your clothing, such as  
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might  
cause injuries.  
• Pregnant women should also use a lap-  
shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be  
positioned as low as possible on the hips to  
avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.  
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your  
hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is  
positioned across your abdomen, it could cause  
serious injuries in a crash.  
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel  
or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the  
floor in front of the seat.  
Restraint systems  
51  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
52  
Warning!  
USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz  
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,  
which operates with the BabySmartTM system  
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  
front airbag when it is properly installed.  
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal  
injury will result.  
Children too big for child restraint systems must  
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position  
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or  
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve  
proper belt positioning.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer  
when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
Infants and small children must ride in back seats  
and be seated in an appropriate infant or child  
restraint system, which is properly secured with  
the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the  
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system  
The passenger side front airbag will not deploy  
only if the 7 indicator lamp remains  
illuminated.  
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed  
for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at  
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for  
use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.  
Please be sure to check the indicator every time  
you use the special system child seat.  
Should the light go out while the restraint is  
installed, please check installation. If the light  
remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint  
to transport children on the front passenger seat  
until the system has been repaired.  
With the special child seat properly installed, the  
passenger front airbag will not deploy. The 7  
indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster will be  
illuminated, except with key removed or in steering lock  
position 0. The system does not deactivate the door  
mounted side impact airbag.  
Self-test BabySmartTM  
Warning!  
without special child seat installed  
The BabySmartTM Airbag Deactivation System will  
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to  
operate with it. It will not work with child seats  
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.  
After turning key in steering lock to position 1 or 2, the  
7 indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster  
comes on for approximately 6 seconds, extinguishes,  
then blinks once.  
Never place anything between seat cushion and  
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the  
effectiveness of the deactivation system.  
If the indicator lamp should not come on or is  
continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must  
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating  
any child on the front passenger seat.  
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for  
installation of special child seats.  
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.  
Restraint systems  
53  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
54  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)  
Seat belt fastened  
Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts.  
Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus  
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were  
designed to operate, and do not afford any protection  
whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not  
designed to deploy.  
first threshold exceeded: ETR activates  
second threshold exceeded: airbag also activates  
Seat belt not fastened  
Front seats:  
The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to  
activate either the Emergency Tensioning Retractor  
(ETR) or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the  
direction and severity of the impact exceeding the  
preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.  
first threshold exceeded:  
airbag activates, but not ETR  
Rear outer seats:  
first threshold exceeded:  
ETR activates  
Driver, front passenger and rear outer seat systems  
operate independently of each other.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)  
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-  
overs, certain side impacts, or other accidents without  
sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency  
tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver  
and passengers will then be protected by the fastened  
seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.  
The seat belts for the outboard passenger seats (except  
in the optional 3rd row seats) are equipped with  
emergency tensioning retractors. These tensioning  
retractors are located in each belt’s inertia reel and  
become operationally ready with the key in steering  
lock position 1 or 2.  
For seat belt and emergency tensioning retractor see  
page 63.  
The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to  
activate only when the seat belts are fastened during  
frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS  
and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level.  
They remove slack from the belts in such a way that the  
seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its  
forward movement as much as possible.  
Restraint systems  
55  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
56  
Airbags  
1 Driver airbag  
2 Front passenger airbag  
The most effective occupant restraint system yet  
developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt.  
In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat  
belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.  
The passenger front airbag is located in the dashboard  
ahead of the front passenger.  
The driver airbag is located in the steering wheel hub.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
3 Side impact airbag, front  
4 Side impact airbag, rear  
The side impact airbags are located in the front and rear  
doors.  
Door mounted side impact airbags can provide  
increased protection to belted outboard occupants on  
the impacted side of the vehicle in side impacts  
exceeding its preset threshold.  
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver  
and front passenger airbags can provide increased  
protection for the driver and front passenger in certain  
frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds.  
Important!  
The operational readiness of the airbag system is  
verified by the indicator lamp “SRS” in the instrument  
cluster when turning the key in steering lock to  
position 1 or 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go  
Restraint systems  
57  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
58  
out after approximately 5 seconds; after the lamp goes  
out, the system continues to monitor the components  
and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  
malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp does not  
come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after  
approximately 5 seconds or if it comes on thereafter,  
a malfunction in the system has been detected.  
In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp has  
gone out following the initial check, interruptions or  
short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the  
driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses,  
and low voltage in the entire system are detected and  
indicated.  
Warning!  
The following system components are monitored or  
undergo a self-check: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition  
circuits, front seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning  
retractors, seat sensor.  
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated  
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be  
operational. For your safety, we strongly  
recommend that you visit an authorized  
Initially, when the key is turned from steering lock  
position 0 to positions 1 or 2, malfunctions in the  
crash-sensor are detected and indicated (the “SRS”  
indicator lamp stays on longer than 5 seconds or does  
not come on).  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to  
have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may  
not be activated when needed in an accident, which  
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might  
deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which  
could also result in injury.  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front airbags  
Note:  
Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the  
side impact airbag to deploy in a crash.  
The driver and front passenger front airbags are  
designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts  
exceeding a preset threshold.  
Important!  
The front passenger airbag deploys only if the front  
passenger seat is occupied and the ü indicator lamp  
in the instrument cluster is not illuminated.  
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain  
frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact  
airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds.  
Note:  
Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient  
severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will  
they provide their supplemental protection.  
Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to  
the “SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in  
that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to  
deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.  
The driver and passenger should always wear their  
seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags  
to provide their intended supplemental protection.  
Side impact airbags  
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts,  
roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or  
other accidents in which the airbags are not  
designed to deploy, the airbags will not be activated.  
The driver and passenger will then be protected by  
the fastened seat belts.  
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in  
certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only  
the side impact airbags on the impacted side of the  
vehicle deploy.  
The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys  
only if the front passenger seat is occupied.  
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the  
airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.  
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a  
properly positioned and fastened seat belt.  
Restraint systems  
59  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
60  
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags  
which are designed to activate in certain impacts  
exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential  
and severity of injury. It is important to your safety  
and that of your passenger that you replace deployed  
airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to  
ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash  
protection for occupants.  
Warning!  
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of  
injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,  
and side (side impact airbags) impacts which may  
cause significant injuries, however, no system  
available today can totally eliminate injuries and  
fatalities.  
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a  
small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust,  
however, is neither injurious to your health, nor  
does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might  
cause some temporary breathing difficulty for  
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To  
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as  
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing  
difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the  
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a  
window or door.  
Warning!  
To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags  
inflate, it is very important for the driver and front  
passenger to always be in a properly seated  
position and to wear their seat belts.  
For maximum protection in the event of a collision  
always be in normal seated position with your back  
against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and  
ensure that it is properly positioned on your body.  
Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed  
and force, a proper seating and hands on steering  
wheel position will help to keep you at a safe  
distance from the airbag. Occupants who are  
unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag  
can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates  
with great force in the blink of an eye:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Sit properly belted in an upright position with  
your back against the backrest.  
• Occupants, especially children, should never  
lean their heads in the area of the door where  
the side airbag inflates. This could result in  
serious injuries or death should the airbag be  
triggered. Always sit upright, properly use the  
seatbelts and appropriate size infant or child  
restraint system.  
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible  
rearward, still permitting proper operation of  
vehicle controls. The distance from the center  
of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the  
airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at  
least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be  
able to accomplish this by a combination of  
adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If  
you have any problems, please see your  
• Children 12 years old and under must never  
ride in the front seat, except in a  
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM  
compatible child seat, which operates with the  
BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to  
deactivate the passenger side front airbag  
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they  
will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in  
a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury  
can result.  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the  
steering wheel or dashboard.  
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel  
rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim  
can increase the risk and potential severity of  
hand/arm injury when the driver front airbag  
inflates.  
Failure to follow these instructions can result in  
severe or fatal injuries to you or other occupants.  
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as  
possible rearward from the dashboard when  
the seat is occupied.  
Restraint systems  
61  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
62  
Warning!  
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow  
these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially  
children, should never place their bodies or lean  
their heads in the area of the door where the side  
airbag inflates. This could result in serious  
injuries or death should the side airbag be  
activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the  
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or  
child restraint system for all children 12 years old  
or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.  
Accident research shows that the safest place for  
children in an automobile is in the rear seat.  
Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or  
under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle,  
you must properly use a BabySmartTM child  
restraint which will turn off the passenger side  
front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn  
off the vehicle’s side impact airbag.  
It should be noted that with respect to both front  
and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility  
for a side airbag related injury if occupants,  
especially children, are not properly seated or  
restrained when next to a side airbag which needs  
to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its  
job.  
If you believe that, even with the use of these  
guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat  
occupants to have both rear door mounted side  
airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be  
accomplished upon your written election to do so at  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an  
additional cost. Please contact your local  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Client  
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes  
(1-800-367-6372) for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,  
emergency tensioning retractor and airbag  
• An airbag system component within the  
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has  
inflated. Do not touch.  
Warning!  
• Improper work on the system, including  
incorrect installation and removal, can lead to  
possible injury through an unintended  
activation of the “SRS”.  
• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly  
stressed in an accident must be replaced and  
their anchoring points must also be checked.  
Use only belts installed or supplied by an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
• No modifications of any kind may be made to  
any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This  
includes changing or removing any component  
or part of the “SRS”, the installation of  
additional trim material, badges etc. over the  
steering wheel hub, front passenger airbag  
cover, or front door trim panels, and  
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges.  
• Do not make any modification that could  
change the effectiveness of the belts.  
• Airbags and ETR’s are designed to function on  
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency  
tensioning retractor (ETR) that was activated  
must be replaced.  
installation of additional electrical/electronic  
equipment on or near “SRS” components and  
wiring. Keep area between airbags and  
occupants free of objects (e.g. packages,  
purses, umbrellas, etc.).  
Restraint systems  
63  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
64  
• In addition, through improper work there is  
the risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or  
causing unintended airbag deployment. Work  
on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed  
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center.  
• Given the considerable deployment speed and  
the textile structure of the airbags, there is the  
possibility of abrasions or other injuries  
resulting from airbag deployment.  
When you sell the vehicle we strongly urge you to give  
notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with  
an “SRS” by alerting him to the applicable section in the  
Operator’s Manual.  
• For your protection and the protection of  
others, when scrapping the airbag unit or  
emergency tensioning retractor, our safety  
instructions must be followed. These  
instructions are available at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Infant and child restraint systems  
Warning!  
We recommend that all infants and children be properly  
restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All  
lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have  
special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child  
restraints.  
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is  
in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will  
be deactivated.  
Important!  
To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint  
instructions for routing. Then pull shoulder belt out  
completely and let it retract. During the seat belt  
retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate  
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt  
is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up  
any slack.  
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in  
all 50 states and all Canadian provinces.  
Infants and small children should be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly  
secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with  
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of  
compliance with this standard can be found on the  
instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction  
manual provided with the restraint.  
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt  
retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in  
the usual manner.  
Note:  
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure  
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s  
instructions for installation and use.  
For child seats with mounting fittings for tether  
anchorages refer to page 67 (installation of infant and  
child restraint systems).  
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside  
of vehicle and to infant or child restraints.  
Restraint systems  
65  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
66  
Warning!  
Infants and small children should never share a  
seat belt with another occupant. During an  
accident, they could be crushed between the  
occupant and seat belt.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz  
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,  
which operates with the BabySmartTM System  
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  
front airbag when it is properly installed.  
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal  
injury can result.  
Children too big for child restraint systems must  
ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position  
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or  
neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve  
proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to  
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly  
without one.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer  
when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
Infants and small children must ride in back seats  
and be seated in an infant or child restraint system,  
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat  
belt, fully in accordance with the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it  
from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to  
prevent the child restraint from becoming a  
projectile in the event of an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation of infant and child restraint systems  
Vehicle without third row seats  
3 Tether anchorages for second row seats  
To secure a tether strap to the anchorage, securely  
fasten the hook (1), which is part of the tether strap, to  
the anchorage ring (2). For safety, please make sure that  
the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety  
catch, as illustrated.  
4 Tether anchorages for third row seats (optional)  
This vehicle is provided with three tether  
anchorages (3) for a top tether strap behind the  
second row seats.  
Note:  
Do not use the tether anchorages (4) for a top tether  
strap on a second row seat.  
Restraint systems  
67  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
68  
Vehicle with third row seats  
We recommend to install infant and child restraints on  
the third row seats.  
When using the third row seats observe the following:  
Installation of infant and child restraint systems  
with a top tether strap is allowed only on both third  
row seats plus the center second row seat.  
When using the center second row seat for a top  
tether strap, the left third row seat should only be  
used for a child restraint system, since exiting the  
vehicle may not be possible in an emergency due to  
the routing of the top tether strap.  
To store the left third row seat, see page 126.  
3 Tether anchorages for second row seats  
4 Tether anchorages for third row seats  
This vehicle is provided with tether anchorages for a top  
tether strap behind the second row seats (3) and the  
third row seats (4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Note:  
When installing an infant or child restraint system with  
a top tether strap on the left second row seat, the left  
third row seat should not be occupied. For storage of the  
left third row seat, see page 126.  
An infant and child restraint system must not be  
installed on the right second row seat while a passenger  
rides in a third row seat. Use of the easy-entry/exit  
feature is not possible. See page 123 for easy-entry/exit  
feature.  
Restraint systems  
69  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Adjustable steering wheel  
Adjustable steering wheel  
70  
Unlocking:  
Move lever (1) down. The indicator lamp, located in the  
instrument cluster, comes on.  
Adjusting:  
Move steering wheel up or down to desired position.  
Locking:  
Move lever (1) up. The indicator lamp, located in the  
instrument cluster, goes out.  
Important!  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. It should go  
out when the engine is running.  
If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, the adjustable steering column is not locked  
properly.  
Warning!  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The  
steering wheel must be locked while driving.  
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or  
driving without the steering wheel locked could  
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked  
the steering column.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inside rear view mirror  
Use your inside mirror to determine the size and  
distance of objects seen in the passenger side convex  
mirror.  
Antiglare night position  
Manual:  
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position using the  
lever (1) at its lower edge.  
Rear view mirrors  
71  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Rear view mirrors  
72  
To deactivate:  
Press button (1) again. The indicator lamp in the rear  
view mirror goes out. The mirror brightness does not  
respond to changes in light sensitivity.  
Notes:  
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the  
interior lamps (except cargo compartment lamp)  
switched on, the mirror brightness does not respond to  
changes in light sensitivity.  
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if  
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the  
mirror.  
Automatic (optional on ML 320):  
With the key in steering lock position 2 and the  
automatic antiglare function activated, the mirror  
reflection brightness responds to changes in light  
sensitivity.  
Warning!  
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  
breaks.  
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the  
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,  
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately  
flush affected area with water, and seek medical  
help if necessary.  
To activate:  
Press button (1). The green indicator lamp in the rear  
view mirror lights up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior rear view mirrors  
First select the mirror to be adjusted – turn switch:  
1 Left mirror  
2 Right mirror  
To adjust, toggle the switch forward, backward or to  
either side.  
Warning!  
Exercise care when using the passenger-side  
mirror. The passenger-side exterior mirror is  
convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field  
of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they  
appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or  
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  
P82.00-2044-26  
The switch is located on the center console.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
Note:  
After turning off the engine the exterior rear view  
mirrors can be operated with a front door opened or  
with key in steering lock position 1 for approximately  
30 minutes.  
Rear view mirrors  
73  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Important!  
Car care  
Index  
Rear view mirrors  
74  
Vehicles with automatic antiglare function:  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the driver’s  
side mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in  
light sensitivity.  
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle  
paint finish can only be completely removed while in  
their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.  
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the  
interior lamps (except cargo compartment lamp)  
switched on, the driver’s side mirror brightness does  
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.  
Notes:  
The exterior mirrors have electrically heated glass. The  
heater switches on automatically, depending on outside  
temperature.  
Warning!  
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its  
normal position, it must be repositioned by applying  
firm pressure until it snaps into place.  
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  
breaks.  
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the  
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,  
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately  
flush affected area with water, and seek medical  
help if necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior rear view mirror, electrically folding  
(optional on ML 320 and ML 430)  
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly forced forward  
or rearward (hit from the front or from the rear), press  
lower half of the switch (2) until you hear a hitting  
noise.  
Press upper half of the switch (1) to fold mirror out.  
You can adjust the exterior rear view mirrors again, see  
page 73.  
1
Notes:  
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are  
not completely folded out.  
2
Before running the vehicle through an automatic car  
wash, fold the mirrors in, otherwise they might get  
damaged.  
P82.00-2016-26  
After turning off the engine the exterior rear view  
mirrors can be operated with a front door opened or  
with key in steering lock position 1 for approximately  
30 minutes.  
The switch is located in the dashboard behind the  
steering wheel.  
1 Press switch to fold mirror out  
2 Press switch to fold mirror in  
Rear view mirrors  
75  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Instrument cluster  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 81  
7 Speedometer  
2 Outside temperature indicator (optional), see  
8 Selectable:  
page 82  
Trip odometer, see page 80  
Main odometer, see page 80  
FSS display, see page 87  
3 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement  
warning lamp, see page 220  
Engine oil level indicator, see page 89  
4 Left turn signal indicator lamp, see exterior lamp  
switch, page 90  
9 Right turn signal indicator lamp, see exterior lamp  
switch, page 90  
5 Knob for odometer/trip odometer readout/reset,  
FSS indicator, and intensity of instrument lamps,  
see page 80  
10 Knob for setting clock, see page 80  
11 Tachometer, see page 82  
6 4-ETS+ and ESP warning lamp, see page 221  
12 Gear range indicator display, see selector lever  
For 4-ETS+ (four wheel electronic traction system),  
see page 203;  
for ESP (electronic stability program), see page 205.  
positions, page 168  
13 Clock, see page 80  
Instrument cluster  
77  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
78  
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster  
ESP and 4-ETS+. Adjust driving to road  
condition, see page 221  
High beam  
Brake fluid low, see page 219  
EBP malfunction, see page 204  
Parking brake engaged, see page 173  
BRAKE  
BAS malfunction, see page 221  
ESP malfunction, see page 221  
BAS  
ESP  
Front passenger airbag automatically  
switched off, see page 53  
4-ETS+ malfunction, see page 221  
Front fog lamp, see page 92  
ABS malfunction, see page 222  
Brake pads worn down, see page 225  
Engine oil level low, see page 224  
Coolant level low, see page 224  
ABS  
Steering wheel adjustment not locked,  
see page 70  
Fasten seat belts,  
see page 223  
Battery not being charged properly,  
see page 223  
SRS malfunction, see page 219  
Transmission in LOW RANGE mode,  
see page 221  
LOW  
RANGE  
SRS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp comes on when the engine is  
running, it indicates a malfunction of the  
fuel management system, emission control  
system, systems which impact emissions, or  
the fuel cap is not closed tight. In all cases,  
we recommend that you have the  
Additional function indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display)  
CHECK  
ENGINE  
FSS indicator (Service A), see page 87  
FSS indicator (Service B), see page 87  
malfunction checked as soon as possible, see  
page 218.  
The symbols appear in the main odometer display field  
prior to the next suggested service. Depending on  
operating conditions throughout the year, the next  
service is calculated and displayed in days or distance  
remaining. See page 87 for notes on the flexible service  
system (FSS).  
Instrument cluster  
79  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Activating instrument cluster display  
80  
Display illumination  
Rotate knob (1) to vary intensity of instrument lamps:  
Clockwise - instrument lamp intensity increases.  
Counterclockwise - instrument lamp intensity  
decreases.  
Odometer/trip odometer  
Activate the instrument cluster.  
Press knob (1) once to switch to or from odometer to  
trip odometer readout.  
Press and hold knob (1) for more than 1 second to  
reset trip odometer (with trip odometer displayed).  
The display for temperature, odometer, oil level  
indicator and clock is activated by:  
Press knob (1) twice to display next scheduled  
service.  
Opening the driver’s door.  
Pressing button (1) in the instrument cluster (with  
Clock  
key removed or in steering lock position 0).  
Adjusting clock (instrument cluster activated):  
Minute: Pull out knob (2) and turn it to the right.  
Hour: Pull out knob (2) and turn it to the left.  
Turning the key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Coolant temperature gauge  
Warning!  
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city  
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red  
marking.  
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated  
can cause some fluids which may have leaked  
into the engine compartment to catch fire. You  
could be seriously burned.  
The engine should not be operated with the coolant  
temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause  
serious engine damage which is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause  
serious burns and can occur just by opening  
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if  
you see or hear steam coming from it.  
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do  
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.  
Instrument cluster  
81  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Tachometer  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Outside temperature indicator  
82  
The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper  
area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by  
road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This  
means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature  
can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer  
placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external  
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).  
The tachometer displays the present engine speed in  
revolutions per minute (RPM).  
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted  
if the engine is operated above its specified limit.  
Adaptation to ambient temperature takes place in steps  
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stop-  
and-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of  
temperature change.  
Warning!  
The outside temperature indicator is not designed  
to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore  
unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated  
temperatures just above the freezing point do not  
guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trip computer (standard; optional on model ML 320)  
To select a mode:  
With key in steering lock position 1 or 2, press MODE  
key repeatedly to illuminate the display and scroll  
through menu for one of the following options:  
1. Date, see page 84.  
2. Compass, see page 84.  
3. Stop watch, see page 86.  
4. Present fuel consumption – displays miles per  
gallon or liters per 100 km.  
5. Average fuel consumption – displays miles per  
gallon or liters per 100 km, see page 86.  
6. Distance remaining with fuel presently in tank.  
Note:  
The trip computer is located in the overhead console.  
Function keys are:  
RESET  
The display flashes when fuel supply drops to the  
reserve level. The distance remaining is no longer  
shown.  
MODE  
7. Language – Press RESET key until the desired  
language is displayed. Depending on language  
selected, information is displayed in that country’s  
customary system. See page 86.  
Note:  
With engine not running, the display switches off  
automatically 30 seconds after the last entry.  
8. Trip computer switched off.  
Trip computer  
83  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Trip computer  
84  
To change an entry, select mode to be changed:  
To change the compass zones:  
Date –  
Determine the geographical point of the vehicle with the  
aid of the zone maps below:  
Press RESET key, the month shown blinks. Now  
press MODE key to advance to selected month.  
1. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
Press RESET key again, the day shown blinks. Now  
press MODE key to advance to selected day.  
2. Press MODE key repeatedly until the compass  
display appears in the trip computer display.  
Press RESET key again, the year shown blinks. Now  
press MODE key to advance to selected year.  
3. Press RESET key to select the compass zone mode.  
The zone selected last is shown in the display.  
Press RESET key again, the display stops blinking  
and the date is set.  
4. Press RESET key repeatedly until the correct  
compass zone, as determined from the zone map, is  
shown in the display.  
Compass –  
The compass displays the direction the vehicle is  
traveling, such as N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.  
5. Press MODE key twice to activate the new compass  
zone and change back to compass display.  
Note:  
The presence of buildings, bridges, power lines and  
large antenna masts can influence the displayed  
values. Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the  
vehicle can influence the accuracy of the compass.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Zone map North America  
Zone map South America  
Trip computer  
85  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Trip computer  
86  
To calibrate the compass:  
7. Without interruption drive two or more full circles  
at a speed between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 7 mph  
(10 km/h) during which the message “CAL” is  
replaced with a compass bearing (e.g. N, SW etc.),  
immediately followed by three full circles at the  
same speed, with only the rear window defroster  
switched on. The defroster can be switched off  
again. The calibration of the compass is now  
complete.  
If the vehicle was exposed to a significant magnetic  
zone, such as high voltage power lines, the compass  
may have to be calibrated.  
Calibration of the compass should be done in an area  
free of steel superstructures and power lines. All  
electrical consumers (e.g. exterior lamps, climate  
control, etc.) should be switched off, doors and liftgate  
closed. Do not open or close the roof. An open door or  
liftgate triggers the display “–––”.  
Stop watch –  
Press RESET key to start the count. Press again to  
stop the count. Press and hold RESET key to reset  
stop watch.  
1. Start and run the engine.  
2. Press MODE key repeatedly until the compass  
display appears in the trip computer display.  
Average fuel consumption –  
Press RESET key to delete present reading.  
Language –  
3. Press RESET key to select the compass zone display.  
4. Press RESET repeatedly until the correct zone, as  
determined from the zone map (see page 85), is  
shown in the display.  
Press RESET key to set the language used in the  
display.  
5. Press MODE key, “CAL–” appears in the display.  
6. Press and hold RESET for a minimum of 2 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flexible service system (FSS)  
(service indicator)  
The display begins to appear either 30 days or  
2000 miles/km prior to the next suggested service.  
The symbols 9 or ´ indicate the type of service  
to be performed:  
9 Service A  
´ Service B  
The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds  
when turning the key in steering lock to position 2, or  
while driving when reaching the service warning  
threshold.  
The message can be canceled manually by pressing  
button (1).  
The next service due date is displayed either in days or  
in miles, depending on your driving style.  
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is  
directly related to the operating conditions of the  
vehicle.  
Once the suggested term has passed, the symbol 9  
or ´ plus message, preceded by a (minus symbol)  
blinks every time when turning the key in steering lock  
to position 2.  
The symbol 9 or ´ appears in the main odometer  
field prior to the next suggested service. Depending on  
operating conditions throughout the year, the next  
service is calculated and displayed in days or distance  
remaining.  
Calling up service indicator manually:  
Activate the instrument cluster, see page 80.  
Within 4 seconds press button (1) twice to call up the  
FSS display for approximately 10 seconds.  
Flexible service system  
87  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Flexible service system  
Important!  
88  
3. The present status for days or distance is displayed.  
Within 10 seconds turn key in steering lock to  
position 0.  
The FSS indicator is not an engine oil level indicator.  
See page 89 for engine oil level indicator.  
4. Press and hold button (1), while turning key in  
steering lock to position 2 again. The present status  
for days or distance is displayed once more.  
Continue to hold button (1).  
Notes:  
When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more  
days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such  
days not counted by the FSS can be added by your  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
After approximately 10 seconds a signal sounds, and  
the display shows 10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km)  
for approximately 10 seconds.  
The interval between services is determined by the type  
of driving for which the vehicle is used. For example,  
driving at extreme speeds, and cold starts combined  
with short distance driving in which the engine does not  
reach normal operating temperature, reduce the interval  
between services.  
5. Release button (1).  
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have it  
corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Notes:  
Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-  
Benz Light Truck Center sets the counter mileage to  
10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km) and 365 days.  
The FSS allows for distances between 10 000 miles  
(Canada: 15 000 km) and 20 000 miles (Canada:  
30 000 km), or from 365 to 730 days between services.  
The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:  
1. Turn the key in steering lock to position 2.  
However you choose to set your reference numbers, the  
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet  
must be followed to properly care for your vehicle.  
2. Immediately press button (1) twice within one  
second.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine oil level indicator  
The following messages are available:  
“OIL i.O”  
No oil needs to be added.  
“–1.0 L”  
“–1.5 L”  
“–2.0 L”  
Add oil to upper (max) mark of the dipstick.  
See page 233 for instructions on adding engine oil.  
“OIL HI”  
Do not overfill the engine.  
Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could  
cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level  
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.  
The display “––––––” flashes in the odometer display  
field if a proper oil level check cannot be performed. The  
engine oil level check can be repeated after a short time.  
Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping  
the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan.  
Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick, if it  
cannot be completed via the odometer display field.  
See page 233.  
Turn the key in steering lock to position 2 and wait until  
the display “––––––” appears in the odometer display  
field.  
In this case we recommend that you have the system  
checked at a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Within 1 second press button (1) twice.  
Engine oil level indicator  
89  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamp switch  
Exterior lamp switch  
90  
ƒ Standing lamps, left or right side (depending on  
turn signal switch position). Turn key in steering  
lock to position 0 or remove.  
Standing lamps, left – move stalk to position (5).  
Standing lamps, right – move stalk to position (4).  
Move stalk to positions:  
1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position õ)  
2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position õ)  
3 High beam flasher (high beam available  
independent of exterior lamp switch position)  
4 Turn signals, right  
Rotate switch $ to positions:  
5 Turn signals, left  
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing  
lanes on a highway, move exterior lamp switch briefly to  
the point of resistance only and release. The turn  
signals blink three times.  
D Off  
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps,  
license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)  
Canada only: When the engine is running, the low  
beam is additionally switched on.  
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the  
exterior lamp switch past the point of resistance (up or  
down). The switch is automatically canceled when the  
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.  
õ Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam  
headlamps (switch pushed forward)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn signal failure  
Daytime running lamps (Canada only)  
If one of the turn signals fails, the turn signal indicator  
system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate.  
When the engine is running and the selector lever is in  
a driving position, the low beam headlamps (includes  
parking lamps, side marker lamps, taillamps and  
license plate lamps) are automatically switched on.  
Standing lamps  
When shifting from a driving position to position “N”  
or “P”, the low beam switches off (2 seconds delay).  
When the vehicle is parked on the street the standing  
lamps (right or left side parking lamps) can be turned  
on, making the vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.  
For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should  
be turned to position õ to permit activation of the  
high beam headlamps.  
The standing lamps cannot be operated with the key in  
steering lock position 1 or 2.  
Note:  
With the key removed and a front door open, a warning  
sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing  
lamps) are not switched off.  
Exterior lamp switch  
91  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fog lamp switch  
92  
Fog lamp switch (except Canada)  
Press down rocker switch symbols:  
1 Auxiliary front fog lamps on (if so equipped). Green  
indicator lamp in instrument cluster comes on.  
Press upper half of the switch again to switch fog  
lamps off. The green indicator lamp in  
instrument cluster goes out.  
2 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side) on. Yellow indicator  
lamp in switch comes on in addition to green  
indicator lamp in instrument cluster.  
Press lower half of the switch again to switch rear  
fog lamp off. The yellow indicator lamp in switch  
goes out.  
Note:  
The switch is located in the center console.  
Front fog lamps operate with the low beam headlamps  
on. Consult your state Motor Vehicle Regulations  
regarding allowable lamp operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fog lamp switch (Canada only)  
2 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side) in addition to front fog  
lamps on. Yellow indicator lamp in switch comes on  
in addition to green indicator lamp in  
instrument cluster.  
Press lower half of the switch again to switch rear  
fog lamp off. The yellow indicator lamp in switch  
goes out.  
When pressing upper half of the switch once with  
front fog lamps and rear fog lamp on, first the rear  
fog lamp is switched off. The yellow indicator lamp  
in the switch goes out. Press upper half of the  
switch again to switch off front fog lamps. The green  
indicator lamp in instrument cluster also goes  
out.  
Note:  
The switch is located in the center console.  
Press down rocker switch symbols:  
Front fog lamps operate with the low beam headlamps  
on. Consult your state Motor Vehicle Regulations  
regarding allowable lamp operation.  
1 Front fog lamps on (if so equipped). Green indicator  
lamp in instrument cluster comes on.  
Press upper half of the switch again to switch fog  
lamps off. The green indicator lamp in  
instrument cluster goes out.  
Fog lamp switch  
93  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Hazard warning flasher  
Hazard warning flasher switch  
94  
Headlamp cleaning system  
(with Xenon headlamps)  
The hazard warning flasher switch is located on top of  
the steering column.  
The hazard warning flasher can be activated either  
manually via the switch located in the dashboard, or it  
is activated automatically at the time an airbag is  
deployed.  
To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once.  
To deactivate, press switch again.  
If hazard warning flasher was activated automatically,  
press switch twice to deactivate.  
Note:  
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning  
flasher in use, turn key in steering lock to position 2  
and activate combination switch for left or right turn  
signal in usual manner. Now deactivate the hazard  
warning flasher, only the selected turn signal will  
operate. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard  
warning flasher must be activated again.  
The switch is located in the instrument panel behind the  
steering wheel.  
The headlamp washer can be activated with the key in  
steering lock position 2.  
Briefly press symbol side of switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield wiper/washer switch  
Move stalk down for:  
Intermittent wiping  
(Interval is vehicle speed dependent1.  
Optional rain sensor: One initial wipe, pauses  
between wipes are automatically controlled by a  
rain sensor monitoring wetness of windshield.)  
Notes:  
With vehicle at a standstill, a front door open and  
the key in steering lock position 2 there will be no  
operation of windshield wipers in intermittent  
setting.  
Optional rain sensor:  
Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle  
is taken to an automatic car wash or when  
cleaning the windshield. Wipers will operate in  
presence of water spray at windshield, and wipers  
may be damaged as a result.  
Move stalk briefly up for single wipe without adding  
washer fluid (use only when windshield is wet).  
Pull stalk toward steering wheel and hold to activate  
wiper and washer.  
Move stalk up for:  
Wiper off  
Normal wiper speed  
Fast wiper speed  
1
At speeds of approximately 105 mph (170 km/h) the wiper  
switches automatically to continuous wiping.  
Windshield wiper/washer  
95  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Rear window wiper/washer  
Rear window wiper/washer  
96  
With key in steering lock position 2:  
1 Press for interval wiping,  
2 Press to switch off,  
1
2
or  
press briefly for approx. 5 seconds wiper operation,  
or  
press and hold for simultaneous operation of wiper  
and washer. After releasing the switch the wiper  
operates for additional 5 seconds.  
The rear window wiper will also automatically engage if  
the windshield wiper is engaged and the gear selector  
lever is placed in “R” Reverse.  
The rear window wiper/washer switch is located in the  
instrument panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield wipers smear  
Blocked windshield wipers  
If the windshield wipers smear the windshield, even  
during rain, activate the washer system as often as  
necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be  
mixed in the correct ratio.  
If the windshield wipers become blocked (for example,  
due to snow), switch off the wipers.  
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove  
key from steering lock. Remove blockage.  
Activate windshield wiper/washer switch again (key in  
steering lock position 1).  
Note:  
For windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio  
see page 237.  
Rear window wiper/washer  
97  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
98  
Climate control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Air volume control switch  
2 Temperature selector switch  
3 Air distribution switch  
4 Air recirculation  
To quickly cool down the passenger compartment, turn  
temperature selector switch fully to the left to  
position O. Turn temperature selector to maintain  
desired temperature.  
The air conditioning mode removes considerable  
moisture from the air during operation in the cooling  
mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground  
through ducts in the underbody.  
5 Air conditioning mode  
6 Air volume control for center air outlets,  
turn wheel up to open.  
Important!  
7 Air volume control for side air outlet,  
This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner system  
that uses R–134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a  
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a  
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected  
in a recovery system for recycling.  
turn wheel up to open.  
8 Center air outlets, adjustable  
9 Side air outlets, adjustable  
10 Windshield air outlets  
11 Floor outlets  
Note:  
For the air flow-through system to function properly, the  
air vents, located in the left and right side rear  
passenger compartment trim panel covers, should be  
kept unobstructed.  
The air conditioning mode only operates with the œ  
button pushed, the air volume control switch set to  
position 1 to 4, and the engine running.  
Climate control  
99  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
100  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
Basic setting - Heater  
Basic setting - Air Conditioner  
Select temperature.  
Switch on air conditioner with control button œ.  
Select air volume with control switch Q, set at least  
Select temperature.  
to position 2 to prevent windows from fogging up.  
Select air volume with control switch Q, set at least  
Set air distribution control switch to position shown  
above.  
to position 1.  
Set air distribution control switch to position a.  
Open side air outlets.  
Turn wheels (7) to position l to open left and right  
side air outlets (9). Adjust air outlets upward.  
Open center air outlets.  
Open center air outlets as desired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special setting (use only for short duration)  
Defogging windows  
Defrosting windshield  
Windows fogged up on inside.  
Set temperature selector and switches for air volume  
Switch on air conditioning mode with control œ.  
and air distribution to position P.  
Switch off air recirculation O. Indicator lamp in  
Turn wheels (7) to position l to open left and right  
button goes out.  
side air outlets (9). Adjust air outlets upward.  
Set air distribution control switch to position c.  
Increase air volume with control switch.  
Turn side air outlet wheels (7) to position l.  
Close center air outlets.  
Close center air outlets.  
Climate control  
101  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
102  
Car care  
Index  
Climate control  
Windshield fogged up on outside.  
Air recirculation  
This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the  
entry of annoying odors or dust into the vehicle’s  
interior.  
Switch on wiper motor.  
Set air distribution control switch to position d  
or a.  
Outside air is not supplied to the vehicles’s interior.  
To select, press O button. Indicator lamp in button  
lights up.  
Dust filter  
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out  
before outside air enters the passenger compartment  
through the air distribution system.  
To cancel, press O button again. Indicator lamp in  
button goes out.  
If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch  
from recirculated air back to fresh air.  
Note:  
Keep the air intake grille in front of windshield free of  
snow and debris.  
Climate control – OFF  
To switch the climate control off, set air volume control  
switch to position 0.  
Switch off air conditioning mode œ. Control lamp in  
button goes out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear window defroster  
Notes:  
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed  
before activating the defroster.  
The rear window defroster consumes a large amount of  
electrical power. To keep the battery drain to a  
minimum, turn off the defroster as soon as the window  
is clear.  
The defroster is automatically turned off after  
approximately 10 to 18 minutes of operation, dependent  
on the outside temperature.  
If several power consumers are turned on  
simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged,  
it is possible that the rear window defroster will  
automatically turn itself off. When this happens, the  
indicator lamp inside the switch starts blinking for  
approximately 30 seconds. If within this time the  
battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster  
automatically turns itself back on.  
The switch is located on the center console.  
With the engine running, press upper half of the switch.  
Indicator lamp in switch comes on.  
To cancel, press upper half of the switch again. Indicator  
lamp in switch goes out.  
After approximately 30 seconds without sufficient  
voltage the rear window defroster switches off (indicator  
lamp goes out).  
Climate control  
103  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
104  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Power windows  
Power window switches located on front center console  
Power window switches located on rear center console  
1 left, front  
6 individual switches (rear doors)  
2 right, front  
3 left, rear  
4 right, rear  
5 Switch for rear door window override  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The windows can be operated with key in steering lock  
position 1 or 2.  
Express opening of front door windows  
Press switch past resistance point and release – window  
lowers to fully open position. To interrupt procedure,  
briefly pull switch.  
Operation:  
Press switch in to resistance point to open.  
Lift switch to close.  
Blocking of rear door window operation  
Release switch when window is in desired position.  
If no operation of the rear door windows by switch (6),  
located on rear center console (for instance by children)  
is desired, slide override switch (5) to right,  
symbol N becomes visible.  
Warning!  
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no  
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  
procedure.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
The closing procedure can be immediately reversed  
by pressing the power window switch.  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
Note:  
After turning off the engine the power windows can be  
operated for approximately 30 minutes or until a front  
door is opened.  
Interior equipment  
105  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
106  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Rear quarter windows (optional on ML 320 and 430)  
Note:  
After turning off the engine the rear quarter windows  
can be operated for approximately 30 minutes or until a  
front door is opened.  
1
Warning!  
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no  
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  
procedure.  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
2
Switches located on front center console  
The rear quarter windows can be operated with key in  
steering lock position 1 or 2.  
1 Push to open.  
2 Push to close.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sliding/pop-up roof (optional)  
The sliding/pop-up roof can be operated with key in  
steering lock position 1 or 2.  
Warning!  
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that  
there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the  
closing procedure.  
The closing procedure can be immediately reversed  
by moving the switch in direction (1) or (3).  
MODE  
ESET  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
P68.00-2429-26  
1 to slide roof open  
2 to slide roof closed  
3 to raise roof at rear  
4 to lower roof at rear  
Notes:  
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed  
manually should an electrical malfunction occur, see  
page 272.  
After turning off the engine the sliding/pop up roof can  
be operated for approximately 30 minutes or until a  
front door is opened.  
Interior equipment  
107  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
108  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Express opening of sliding/pop-up roof  
To open sliding/pop-up roof automatically, briefly move  
switch in direction (1) and release. The roof will not  
open fully. Press again to open it fully.  
To interrupt procedure, briefly move switch in any  
direction.  
Note:  
For resynchronizing the express opening feature see  
page 272.  
MODE  
RESET  
With the roof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid  
into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When  
sliding the roof open, the screen will also retract.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Skyview Top (optional)  
To fully open Skyview Top automatically, briefly press  
switch in direction (1) and release. To stop the process,  
press switch again.  
Warning!  
When closing the Skyview Top, be sure that there  
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  
procedure.  
MO
RESET  
The closing procedure can be immediately reversed  
by moving the switch in direction (1).  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
The Skyview Top can be operated with key in steering  
lock position 1 or 2.  
Notes:  
1 to slide roof open  
After turning off the engine the Skyview Top can be  
operated for approximately 30 minutes or until a front  
door is opened.  
2 to slide roof closed  
The Skyview Top can be opened or closed manually  
should an electrical malfunction occur, see page 273.  
Interior equipment  
109  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
110  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Interior lighting  
E
MOD  
T
RESE  
Lamps above instrument panel  
Reading lamps in inside rear view mirror  
Interior lamps above instrument panel are switched on,  
and off (soft fade) delayed, when unlocking the vehicle,  
or when opening a front door or closing front doors.  
1 Reading lamp, left  
2 Push button to switch left reading lamp on and off  
3 Push button to switch right reading lamp on and off  
4 Reading lamp, right  
With doors closed, push on lamp lens to switch interior  
lamps on or off.  
The reading lamps cannot be switched on and off by the  
door contact switches.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
Lamps above rear doors  
Cargo compartment lamp  
Interior lamps above rear doors are switched on, and off  
(soft fade) delayed, when opening a rear door or closing  
rear doors.  
1 The lamp is switched off.  
2 The lamp is switched on continuously.  
With rear doors closed, push on lamp lens to switch  
interior lamps on or off.  
To prevent the vehicle battery from being  
discharged, move switch to position (1) or (3) before  
leaving the vehicle.  
Note:  
3 The lamp is switched on and off by the opening and  
If lamp is switched on manually, it does not go out by  
closing the door.  
closing of the liftgate.  
Interior equipment  
111  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
112  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Switch for interior lamps/lamps above rear doors  
2 Press in to switch interior lamps off (except cargo  
compartment lamp).  
The interior lamps remain switched off, even when  
opening a door.  
With rocker switch in center position, the interior  
lamps operate as described on previous pages.  
Entrance lamps, exit lamps in doors  
The lamps are switched on and off by the door contact  
switches.  
Notes:  
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged,  
with doors open all interior lamps (except rear cargo  
compartment lamp) go out after approximately  
30 minutes.  
1 Press to switch lamps above rear doors off.  
To switch both lamps above rear doors on, briefly  
press upper half of switch again.  
If an interior lamp is switched on manually, it does not  
go out automatically. Before leaving the vehicle, make  
sure that all interior lamps are switched off.  
Note:  
With one lamp above rear door illuminated, first the  
lamp goes out when pressing upper half of the  
switch. Press again to switch both lamps on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sun visors  
Illuminated vanity mirrors  
Swing sun visors down to protect against sun glare.  
With the visor engaged in its inner mounting and with  
key in steering lock position 1 or 2, the lamp is switched  
on by opening the cover.  
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage  
visor from inner mounting, pivot it to the side, and slide  
it to the desired position.  
Warning!  
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.  
Interior equipment  
113  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
114  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Interior  
Storage compartments, armrest and cup holder  
Warning!  
Warning!  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing  
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than  
the seat backs.  
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to  
prevent stored objects from being thrown about  
and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident  
and sudden maneuvers.  
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glove box  
Storage compartment below center armrest  
Pull handle (1) to open.  
To open compartment:  
Press button and lift lid.  
The glove box is illuminated with key in steering lock  
position 1 or 2 when opening the lid.  
To close:  
Lower lid until it engages in lock.  
Interior equipment  
115  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
116  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Storage compartment under front passenger seat  
Cup holder in instrument panel  
(standard; optional on model ML 320)  
The storage compartment under the front passenger  
seat is lockable with its separate key (1).  
Touch top of cover. The cup holder (1) opens  
automatically.  
Note:  
Caution!  
Slide seat rearward to gain easier access to the storage  
compartment.  
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only  
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.  
Do not fill containers to a height where the contents  
could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot  
liquids.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cup holder in rear center console  
Armrest in rear bench seat  
To open cup holder (2), pull down at top of cover.  
Pull down armrest (1) by its top.  
Caution!  
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only  
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills.  
Do not fill containers to a height where the contents  
could spill during vehicle maneuvers, especially hot  
liquids.  
Interior equipment  
117  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
118  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Ashtrays  
Rear passenger compartment  
Center console, front  
Pull to open.  
By touching the top of the cover lightly, the ashtray  
opens automatically.  
To remove ashtray:  
Open ashtray (1) and pull out the ashtray insert.  
To remove ashtray: Pull up and remove ashtray insert.  
Warning!  
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing  
still. Turn off the engine and set the parking brake.  
Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of  
unintended contact with the gear selector lever.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lighter  
Warning!  
Never touch the heating element or sides of the  
lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock. Do not leave children  
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an  
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle  
equipment may cause serious personal injury.  
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate  
electrical accessories up to maximum 50 W.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2. Push in  
lighter (1); it will pop out automatically when hot.  
Interior equipment  
119  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
120  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Split rear seat bench  
To slide rear seat bench fore/aft:  
1. Pull lever (1) in direction of arrow, and slide seat  
bench section to desired position until it locks in  
place.  
To enlarge cargo area:  
1. Close cup holder in rear center console.  
2. Move front seats forward, see page 39 for manual  
seats and page 40 for power seats.  
3. Pull lever (1) in direction of arrow, and slide seat  
bench section forward.  
4. Remove head restraint(s). The head restraint(s)  
should be stored beneath the cargo floor plates.  
The rear seat bench can be moved fore/aft, folded and  
lowered to increase the cargo area. The left, right or  
both seat back sections may folded down according to  
need.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull lock button (2) up, and fold seat back forward  
until it locks in place.  
6. Press lock button (3) to unlock lever (4). Pull  
lever (4) in direction of arrow (5), then pull lever (1)  
and push down seat bench section until it locks in  
place.  
The red backrest lock indicators at the lock  
buttons (2) are not visible in locked position.  
Interior equipment  
121  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
122  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
To return seat bench section to sitting position:  
4. Install and adjust head restraint.  
For installation of head restraints see page 124.  
1. Pull lever (1) and raise seat bench section until it  
locks in place.  
Warning!  
2. Pull lock button (2) up, and unfold seat back to  
upright position. Check for secure locking by  
pushing and pulling on the backrest. The red  
backrest lock indicators at the lock buttons (2) are  
not visible in locked position.  
Failure to assure that seats are locked into place  
could result in an increased chance of injury in an  
accident.  
Never place hands under seat or near any moving  
parts while a seat is being adjusted.  
3. Pull lever (1) in direction of arrow, and slide seat  
bench section rearward to desired position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Easy entry/exit feature  
(only in vehicles with third row seats)  
4. Pull lock button (2) of seat back up, and fold seat  
back forward.  
5. Remove respective cargo floor plate, see page 129.  
6. Pull lever (6) up, and fold seat bench section  
forward.  
Resetting seat bench:  
1. Pull down on seat bench section until it locks into  
place.  
2. Pull lock button (2) up, and unfold seat back to  
upright position. Check for secure locking by  
pushing and pulling on the backrest. The backrest  
lock indicators at the lock buttons (2) are not visible  
in locked position.  
Folding right seat bench section for access to rear  
compartment area:  
3. Pull up and adjust head restraint.  
Caution!  
1. Move right front seat forward.  
2. Slide seat bench section forward.  
Never drive with the second row right seat folded  
forward (easy entry/exit feature). It could open and fold  
back unintentionally.  
3. Push head restraint fully down and tilt it forward,  
see page 43.  
When unfolding the seat, be sure that there is no danger  
of anyone being harmed by the procedure.  
Interior equipment  
123  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
124  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Rear seat head restraints  
Raising:  
Pull up on head restraint.  
Lowering:  
Push down on head restraint.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head  
approximately at ear level. The head restraint angle can  
also be adjusted manually.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal:  
Warning!  
Pull head restraint to its highest position. Push lock  
button (1) and pull out head restraint completely with  
both hands. The head restraint(s) should be stored  
below the cargo floor plates.  
For your protection, drive only with properly  
positioned head restraints.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the  
head approximately at ear level.  
Installation:  
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head  
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help  
reduce injuries during an accident.  
Insert the head restraint and push it down to the stop.  
Ensure proper head restraint positioning, see above.  
Caution!  
Do not remove head restraints except when mounting  
seat covers. Whenever head restraints have been  
removed be sure to reinstall them before driving.  
Interior equipment  
125  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
126  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Third row seats (MB Accessory)  
4
4. Disengage hook (2) and attach belt at hook and loop  
strip on underside of seat.  
Two single seats can be unfolded to enlarge the seating  
area.  
5. Fold seat down until it locks securely in place.  
To fold seat down:  
Important!  
1. Remove head restraint from seat cushion.  
2. Remove cargo floor plate, see page 129.  
When seat is correctly unfolded, the red marking on  
the seat release (4) should not be visible.  
6. Store cargo floor plates inside the backrest, see  
page 130.  
3. Lift tensioner (1) upward to a horizontal position to  
release tension of the strap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Pull release lever (3) and unfold seat back until it  
locks securely in place.  
Warning!  
Failure to assure that seats are locked into place  
could result in an increased chance of injury in an  
accident.  
8. Install head restraint in seat back.  
Note:  
Never place hands under seat or near any moving  
parts while a seat is being adjusted.  
For removal and installation of head restraint refer to  
rear seat head restraints on page 124.  
For your protection, drive only with properly  
positioned head restraints.  
To store seat:  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the  
head approximately at ear level.  
1. Remove head restraint from seat back.  
2. Pull release lever (3) and fold seat back forward  
until it audibly locks securely in place. Place seat  
belt between lever (3) and backrest.  
3. Remove cargo floor plates from the backrest.  
4. Pull seat release (4) and fold seat up. Engage  
hook (2) in ceiling mount. Pull on free end of strap  
until tight.  
5. Install head restraint in openings provided in seat  
cushion.  
6. Install cargo floor plates, see page 129.  
Interior equipment  
127  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
128  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
To remove seat:  
3. Move lever (5) upward and remove seat.  
1. Lift tensioner (1) upward to a horizontal position to  
release tension of the strap.  
2. Disengage hook (2) and attach belt at hook and loop  
strip on underside of seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removable cargo floor plates  
To remove:  
Lift cargo floor plate at rear edge until it unhinges.  
Remove cargo floor plate by pulling it rearward.  
To install:  
Grip into opening (2) and guide pins (3) into attachment  
openings (4) until release (5) audibly locks.  
The cargo floor plates (1) behind the split rear seat  
bench are removable.  
Interior equipment  
129  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
130  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Storage of cargo floor plates  
To store cargo floor plates, open hook and loop strip (6)  
at bottom of backrest of the split rear seat bench and  
insert floor plates (7, arrow).  
Note:  
Before storing the left cargo floor plate, fold it together  
in direction of arrow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enlarged cargo area  
Warning!  
The cargo area can be enlarged by moving the rear seat  
bench forward. Also, the left, the right or both sections  
may be folded according to need.  
Always lock backrest in its upright position when  
rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or cargo  
is being carried behind the seat bench.  
For folding and resetting seating to standard positions,  
see page 120.  
To help avoid personal injury from smaller objects  
flying in the occupant area during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, always use partition net when  
transporting cargo, see page 133.  
Interior equipment  
131  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
132  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Cargo tie-down rings  
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all  
rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the  
cargo. The cargo area is provided with four tie-down  
anchors. Additional two rings are located at the rear of  
front seats.  
Caution!  
While the partition net will help protect you from  
smaller objects, it cannot prevent the movement of  
large, heavier objects into the passenger area in an  
accident. Such items must be properly secured using  
the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo area floor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hooks  
Partition net (Optional)  
Use of the partition net is a particularly important safety  
factor when the vehicle is loaded higher than the top of  
the seat backrests with smaller objects.  
The partition net can be installed behind the backrests  
of the front or rear seats.  
Note:  
Passenger use of seats behind installed partition net is  
restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the  
net.  
Four hooks, located on the rear compartment trim  
panels can be used to secure light weight items  
(maximum permissible weight per hook: 9 lbs. [4 kg]).  
Interior equipment  
133  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
134  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Installation:  
2. Insert tie down hooks (2) in rings (3) behind the  
front seats.  
1. Engage partition net in holders (1) and close rear  
cover.  
3. Pull on loose ends of tie downs until net is tight.  
For installation behind the rear seats, see next page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removal:  
1. Lift tensioner (4) upward to a horizontal position to  
release tensioning of the strap.  
2. Disengage tie down hooks (2) from rings (3).  
3. Remove partition net from holders (1) and close the  
covers.  
Storage:  
1. Roll up and close partition net.  
2. Store partition net behind rear seat bench.  
Installation behind rear seats  
Caution!  
While the partition net will help protect you from  
smaller objects, it cannot prevent the movement of  
large, heavier objects into the passenger area in an  
accident. Such items must be properly secured using  
the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo area floor, see  
page 132.  
1. Insert tie down hooks (2) in rings (3) behind the  
rear seats.  
2. Pull on loose ends of tie downs until net is tight.  
Interior equipment  
135  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
136  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Loading instructions  
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and  
luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity  
weight indicated on the certification label which can be  
found on the left door pillar.  
Always place items being carried against front or rear  
seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.  
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept  
as low as possible against front or rear seat backrest  
since it influences the handling characteristics of the  
vehicle.  
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle  
depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore  
recommended to load the vehicle according to the  
illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being  
placed towards the front of the vehicle.  
For additional safety when transporting cargo while the  
rear seats are unoccupied, fasten the outer seat belts  
crosswise into the opposite side buckles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Cargo area cover blind  
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. The  
enlarged cargo area should only be used for items which  
do not fit in the trunk alone.  
Warning!  
Always fasten items being carried as securely as  
possible using cargo tie-down rings and fastening  
materials appropriate for the weight and size of the  
load.  
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden  
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around  
inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle  
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in  
the vehicle.  
Closing blind:  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, always use partition net when  
transporting cargo.  
Pull blind (visual protection) across luggage/cargo area,  
and guide into holders (1) next to liftgate.  
Never drive vehicle with the liftgate open. Deadly  
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle  
interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.  
Opening blind:  
To roll up blind, disengage blind and guide retraction by  
its handle.  
Interior equipment  
137  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
138  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Installing blind:  
Place left side of blind in left mount. Position right side  
of blind over right mount. Push button (1), releasing  
mounting sleeve to slide into mount.  
2
Notes:  
A removable cap is fitted into the mount openings on  
vehicles fitted with third row seats.  
Passenger use of third row seats with cargo area cover  
blind installed is restricted.  
Removing blind:  
Pull right side mounting sleeve toward vehicle center  
(arrow) until button (1) engages, and remove blind from  
holders.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone, general  
Warning!  
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being  
connected to an external antenna) from inside the  
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could  
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic  
system, possibly resulting in an accident and  
personal injury.  
A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/  
her primary focus when driving. For your safety  
and the safety of others, we recommend that you  
pull over to a safe location and stop before placing  
or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the  
telephone while driving, please use the hands-free  
device and only use the telephone when road and  
traffic conditions permit.  
See separate instruction manual for instructions on how  
to operate the telephone.  
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a  
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.  
Cellular telephone  
Warning!  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering  
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a  
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether  
or not prohibited by law, for safety reasons, the  
driver should not use the cellular telephone while  
the vehicle is in motion.  
Stop the vehicle in an safe location before  
answering or placing a call.  
Interior equipment  
139  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
140  
Car care  
Index  
Garage door opener  
Garage door opener  
The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to  
three separately controlled objects.  
Warning!  
When programming a garage door opener, the door  
moves up or down.  
When programming or operating the remote  
control make sure there is no possibility of anyone  
being harmed by the moving door.  
E
MOD  
T
RESE  
Notes:  
Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible  
with the integrated opener. If you should experience  
difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or  
call Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the  
USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer  
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
1 Signal transmitter keys  
2 Portable remote control transmitter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For operation in the USA only: This device complies  
with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-  
held transmitter button and the desired integrated  
remote control button. Do not release the buttons  
until completing step 4.  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control  
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the  
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be  
released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates  
successful programming of the new frequency  
signal). To program the remaining two buttons,  
follow steps 1 through 4.  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
WARNING: Changes or modification not expressly  
approved by party responsible for compliance could void  
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Programming or reprogramming the integrated  
remote control:  
Note:  
If after repeated attempts, you do not successfully  
program the integrated remote control device to learn  
the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door  
opener could be equipped with the “rolling code  
feature”.  
1. Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the  
device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches  
(5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the  
integrated remote control located on the overhead  
console, keeping the indicator lamp in view.  
Garage door opener  
141  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
142  
Car care  
Index  
Garage door opener  
Rolling code programming:  
3. Firmly press and release the programmed  
integrated remote control transmit button. Press  
and release same button a second time to complete  
the training process. (Some garage door openers  
may require you to do this procedure a third time to  
complete the training.)  
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code  
devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these  
instructions after completing the “Programming”  
portion of this text. (A second person may make the  
following training procedures quicker and easier.)  
4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the  
programmed button on the integrated remote  
control transmitter.  
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener  
motor head unit. Exact location and color of the  
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If  
there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,  
reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.  
Canadian programming:  
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may  
automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and  
hold the integrated remote control transmitter button  
(note steps 1 through 4 in the “Programming” portion)  
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held  
transmitter every two seconds until the frequency  
signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash  
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon  
successful training.  
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener  
motor head unit (which activated the “training  
light”).  
Note:  
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate  
step 3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation of remote control:  
Erasing the remote control memory:  
1. Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
1. Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate  
the remote controlled device. The integrated remote  
control transmitter continues to send the signal as  
long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.  
2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side  
buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the  
control lamp blinks rapidly, will erase the codes of  
all three channels.  
Garage door opener  
143  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving instructions .......................174 Off-Road driving .............................183  
Drive sensibly – save fuel .........174 Trailer towing .................................190  
Drinking and driving .................174 Cruise control .................................196  
Pedals ...........................................174 Brake assist system (BAS) ............199  
Power assistance ........................ 175 Antilock brake system (ABS) .......201  
Brakes .......................................... 175 Four-wheel electronic  
Driving  
Control and operation of  
radio transmitters .....................146  
The first 1 000 miles  
(1 500 km) .................................147  
Maintenance ...................................147  
Tele Aid ...........................................148  
Catalytic converter ........................160  
Emission control ............................ 161  
Steering lock ...................................162  
Starting and turning off  
the engine ..................................164  
Automatic transmission ...............165  
Parking brake .................................173  
traction system (4-ETS+) ..........203  
Driving off ....................................176  
Parking .........................................176  
Tires ............................................. 177  
Snow chains ............................... 179  
Winter driving instructions ......180  
Deep water ...................................181  
Passenger compartment ............182  
Traveling abroad .........................182  
Electronic brake  
proportioning (EBP) ..................204  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP) ...........................................205  
Transmission control –  
LOW RANGE mode ...................209  
What you should know  
at the gas station .......................212  
Check regularly and  
before a long trip ...................... 215  
Contents - Driving  
145  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Control and operation of radio transmitters  
Control and operation of radio transmitters  
146  
MCS, radio and telephone  
Telephones and two-way radio  
Warning!  
Warning!  
Please do not forget that your primary  
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being  
connected to an external antenna) from inside the  
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could  
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic  
system, possibly resulting in an accident and  
personal injury.  
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate  
the MCS, radio or telephone1 if road and traffic  
conditions permit.  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering  
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a  
citizens band unit should only be used inside the  
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is  
installed on the outside of the vehicle.  
1
Observe all legal requirements.  
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions  
regarding use of an external antenna.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)  
Maintenance  
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the  
break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its  
performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle  
during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate  
vehicle and engine speeds.  
Approximately 30 days or 2 000 miles  
(Canada: 2000 km) prior to the next recommended  
service, the remaining distance or days are displayed in  
the multifunction indicator. See Flexible Service System  
(FSS) on page 87.  
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle  
driving) and excessive engine speeds.  
We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle  
serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center, in accordance with the Service Booklet at the  
times called for by the FSS.  
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended  
to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear.  
We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1”  
only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).  
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance  
with the Service Booklet at the designated times/  
mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by  
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually  
increased to the permissible maximum.  
Check regularly and before a long trip, see page 215.  
The first 1 000 miles  
147  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
148  
Tele Aid  
Important!  
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the  
vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not  
damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.  
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted  
using the volume control on the MCS unit. To activate,  
press the “SOS” button, the Roadside Assistance  
button or the Information button ¡, depending  
on the type of response required.  
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be  
performed by completing the subscriber agreement and  
placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button.  
Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a  
system that is not activated. If the system is not  
activated the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays  
on after turning electronic key in starter switch to  
position 2 and the message “TELE AID – NOT  
ACTIVATED” will be shown in the MCS display for  
approx. 10 seconds.  
Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call,  
you will receive a user ID and password via first call  
mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting  
“Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account  
information, remote door unlock, Info Services* profile  
and more.  
If you have any questions regarding activation, please  
call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)  
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).  
* Optional  
System self-check  
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)  
Initially, after turning the key in steering lock to  
position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the  
indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the Roadside  
Assistance button and Information button ¡  
stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The  
message “TELE AID – PLEASE VISIT WORKSHOP”  
appears in the MCS display.  
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response;  
automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance  
and information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator  
lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The  
message “EMERGENCY CALL – CONNECTING CALL”  
appears in the MCS display. When the connection is  
established, the message “EMERGENCY CALL – CALL  
CONNECTED” appears in the MCS display. All  
information relevant to the emergency, such as the  
location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite  
location system), vehicle model, identification number  
and color are generated.  
Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the  
“SOS” button, the Roadside Assistance button and  
the Information button ¡ do not remain illuminated  
constantly in red and the message “TELE AID – VISIT  
WORKSHOP” is not displayed in the MCS display after  
the system self check.  
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the  
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center as soon as possible.  
A voice connection between the Response Center and  
the occupants of the vehicle will be established  
automatically soon after the emergency call has been  
initiated. When a voice connection is established the  
audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID –  
EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE” appears in the MCS  
display. The Response Center will attempt to determine  
more precisely the nature of the accident provided they  
can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.  
Emergency calls  
An emergency call is initiated automatically:  
following an accident in which the Emergency  
Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy,  
if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on  
for more than 20 seconds, see pages 35 and 36.  
An emergency call can also be initiated manually by  
opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror  
labeled “SOS”, then pressing the button (for longer than  
2 seconds) located under the cover. See below for  
instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.  
Tele Aid  
149  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
150  
The Tele Aid system is available if:  
Warning!  
it has been activated and is operational. Activation  
requires a subscription for monitoring services and  
cellular air time  
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is  
illuminated continuously and there was no voice  
connection to the Response Center established,  
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an  
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone  
network is not available). The message  
the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals  
are available and pass the information on to the  
response center.  
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL FAILED” appears in  
the MCS display for approx. 10 seconds.  
Note:  
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned  
by other means.  
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the  
vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite  
network and pass the information on to the response  
center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initiating an emergency call manually  
1
2
MOD  
E
M
ODE  
RESET  
RESET  
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.  
Press the SOS button (2) briefly (for longer than  
2 seconds). The indicator lamp in the SOS button (2)  
will flash until the emergency call is concluded. Wait for  
a voice connection to the Response Center.  
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is  
concluded.  
Tele Aid  
151  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
152  
Roadside Assistance button •  
Warning!  
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the  
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in  
a dangerous road location), please do not wait for  
voice contact after you have pressed the emergency  
button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a  
safe location. The Response Center will  
automatically contact local emergency officials  
with the vehicle’s approximate location if they  
receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make  
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.  
3
MOD  
E
RESET  
Located in the overhead control panel is the Roadside  
Assistance button . Briefly press on cover (3) – the  
cover will open.  
Pressing and holding the Roadside Assistance  
button (for longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a  
call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher.  
The button will flash while the call is in progress. The  
message “ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING  
CALL” appears in the MCS display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the connection is established, the message  
“ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CALL CONNECTED”  
appears in the MCS display. The Tele Aid system will  
transmit data generating the vehicle identification  
number, model, color and location (subject to  
availability of cellular and GPS signals).  
These programs are only available in the USA:  
Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start,  
a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire  
with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable,  
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits  
the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher  
to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle  
data.  
While the call is connected, you can change to  
navigation menu by pressing NAVI button on the MCS.  
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance  
dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be  
established. When a voice connection is established the  
audio system mutes and the message “TELE AID –  
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE” appears in the  
MCS display. The nature of the need for assistance can  
then be described. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside  
assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified  
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your  
vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. For  
services such as labor and/or towing charges may apply.  
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more  
information.  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  
button remains illuminated in red for  
approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check  
after turning key in steering lock to position 2 (together  
with the “SOS” button and the Information  
button ¡).  
See system self-check on page 148 when the indicator  
lamp does not light up in red or stay on longer than  
approximately 10 seconds.  
Tele Aid  
153  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
154  
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  
button is illuminated continuously and there was  
no voice connection to the Response Center established,  
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside  
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network  
is not available). The message “ROADSIDE  
ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED” appears in the MCS  
display.  
Information button ¡  
3
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by  
other means.  
MOD  
RESET  
E
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the  
END button on the MCS unit.  
Located in the overhead control panel is the Information  
button ¡. Briefly press on cover (3) – the cover will  
open.  
Pressing and holding the Information button ¡ (for  
longer than 2 seconds) will initiate a call to the Client  
Assistance Center. The button will flash while the call is  
in progress. The message “INFO – CONNECTING CALL”  
appears in the MCS display. When the connection is  
established, the message “INFO – CALL CONNECTED”  
appears in the MCS display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the  
vehicle identification number, model, color and location  
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡  
remains illuminated in red for approximately  
While the call is connected, you can change to  
navigation menu by pressing NAVI button on the MCS.  
10 seconds during the system self-check after turning  
key in steering lock to position 2 (together with the  
“SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button ).  
A voice connection between the Client Assistance  
Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle  
will be established. When a voice connection is  
established, the audio system mutes and the message  
“TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE” appears in the MCS  
display. Information regarding the operation of your  
vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center  
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is  
available to you.  
See system self-check on page 148 when the indicator  
lamps do not light up in red or stay on longer than  
approximately 10 seconds.  
If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is  
illuminated continuously and there was no voice  
connection to the Response Center established, then the  
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside  
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network  
is not available). The message “Info – CALL FAILED”  
appears in the MCS display.  
For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit  
www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to  
you separately, to learn more (USA only).  
Should this occur, information must be summoned by  
other means.  
Information calls can be terminated using the END  
button on the MCS unit.  
Tele Aid  
155  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
156  
Important!  
Upgrade Signals  
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after  
pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in  
red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault  
or the service is not currently active, and may not  
initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center and have the system checked or contact the  
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or  
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.  
Tele Aid system processes calls using the following  
priority.  
Automatic emergency – First priority  
Manual emergency – Second priority  
Roadside assistance – Third priority  
Information – Fourth priority  
Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are  
connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard,  
and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain  
information such as vehicle identification number or  
client information is not available, the operator may  
need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a  
chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice  
contact will resume once the retransmission is  
completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be  
heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop  
flashing. The MCS system operation will resume.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Remote door unlock  
If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system  
does not reset, contact the Response Center at  
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or  
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.  
In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally  
(e.g. key inside vehicle), and the reserve key is not  
handy, contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at  
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada). You will be asked to provide your password  
which you provided when you completed the subscriber  
agreement.  
Notes:  
Then return to your vehicle and pull outside handle of  
liftgate for a minimum of 20 seconds until the “SOS”  
button is flashing.  
The indicator lamp for the respective button flashes  
until the call is concluded and this can only be  
completed by a Response Center or Client Assistance  
Center representative, except Roadside assistance and  
Information calls, which can also be terminated by  
using the End button on the MCS unit.  
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via  
Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly  
after the completion of your Acquaintance Call.  
The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with  
the remote door unlocking feature.  
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the MCS system  
audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or  
CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed)  
switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle  
must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place  
the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will  
continue to run. A pop-up window will appear in the  
MCS display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in  
progress.  
Note:  
The remote door unlock feature is available if the  
relevant cellular phone network is available.  
The SOS button will flash and the message  
“EMERGENCY CALL – CALL CONNECTED” will appear  
in the MCS display to indicate receipt of the door unlock  
command.  
Tele Aid  
157  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
158  
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center  
specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the  
vehicle occupants.  
Stolen vehicle tracking services  
In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident  
to the police who will issue a numbered incident report.  
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response  
Center.  
If the outside liftgate handle was pulled for more than  
20 seconds before door unlock authorization was  
received by the Response Center, you must wait  
15 minutes before pulling the outside liftgate handle  
again.  
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly  
contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle  
is located, the Response Center will contact the local  
Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will  
only be provided to Law Enforcement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Info Services (optional, except Canada)  
Important!  
Info Services categories include news, sports, stocks,  
weather and calendar reminders. Choices can be  
selected via www.mbusa.com or by calling 1-800-FOR-  
MERcedes.  
Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for  
communication and the GPS (Global Positioning  
System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these  
signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not  
function and if this occurs, assistance must be  
summoned by other means.  
To request Info Services press the TEL button and then  
the SVC soft key on the MCS unit. Then select UPDT  
soft key. “NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST  
Warning!  
TRANSMITTED” will appear in the MCS display and call  
status messages will appear in the MCS display.  
The Tele Aid control unit is located under the front  
passenger seat. If there is accumulation of water or  
other liquid in this area, the Tele Aid control unit  
could suffer an electrical short circuit making the  
system inoperative. In this case the indicator lamp  
in the “SOS” button will not illuminate during or  
will remain illuminated after the system self-check.  
Have the system checked at the nearest  
Once information is available, the message “NEW INFO  
RECEIVED READ LATER WHEN STOPPED?” will appear.  
Select “Yes”. With the vehicle stopped in a safe location  
press TEL button, SVC soft key to read messages.  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as  
possible.  
Tele Aid  
159  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Catalytic converter  
Catalytic converter  
160  
Caution!  
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type  
catalytic converters, an important element in  
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only  
premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.  
conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve  
substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust  
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating  
condition by following our recommended maintenance  
instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.  
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should  
be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned  
fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to  
overheat, which could start a fire.  
Warning!  
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate  
this vehicle in areas where combustible materials  
such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact  
with the hot exhaust system, as these materials  
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emission control  
Warning!  
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic  
components of the exhaust gases within permissible  
limits required by law.  
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your  
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,  
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and  
lead to death.  
These systems, of course, will function properly only  
when maintained strictly according to factory  
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a  
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you  
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the  
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined  
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under  
these conditions, drive only with at least one  
window fully open.  
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,  
therefore, be carried out only by authorized Mercedes-  
Benz Light Truck Center qualified technicians. Engine  
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,  
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly  
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.  
For details refer to the Service Booklet.  
Emission control  
161  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Steering lock  
162  
Steering lock  
1 Steering is unlocked.  
(If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow  
the key to be turned clockwise to position 1.) Most  
electrical consumers can be operated. For detailed  
information see respective subjects.  
2 Driving position.  
3 Starting position.  
See page 164 for starting and turning off the engine.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment may cause serious personal  
injury.  
0 The key can be withdrawn in this position only. The  
steering is locked when the key is removed from the  
steering lock. If necessary, move steering wheel  
slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.  
The key can only be removed with the selector lever  
in position “P”. After removing the key or with the  
key in steering lock position 0, the selector lever is  
locked in position “P”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution!  
It is therefore recommended that you turn off  
unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stop-  
and-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of  
the battery.  
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible  
dead battery, always remove the key from the steering  
lock. Do not leave the key in steering lock position 0.  
Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system  
may be minimized by turning off the following power  
consumers, for example: Heated seats, rear window  
defroster.  
Notes:  
A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened  
while the key is in steering lock position 1 or 0.  
With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the  
alternator (output) is limited.  
Steering lock  
163  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Starting and turning off the engine  
164  
Starting and turning off the engine  
Important!  
Due to the installed starter non-repeat feature, the key  
must be turned completely to the left before attempting  
to start the engine again.  
Before starting  
Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector  
lever is in position “P” or “N”. Turn key in steering lock  
to position 2. The charge indicator lamp should come on.  
In areas where temperatures frequently drop below -4°F  
(-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater be  
installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center will advise you on this subject.  
Starting  
Note:  
Do not depress accelerator.  
In case the engine cannot be started and the  
messages Á and î are shown in the odometer  
display field, the system is not operational. Contact an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100  
(in Canada).  
Briefly turn key in steering lock clockwise to the stop  
and release. The starter will engage until the engine is  
running.  
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops,  
turn key completely to the left and repeat starting the  
engine.  
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system  
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center.  
Turning off  
Turn the key in the steering lock to position 0 to stop the  
engine.  
A starting procedure can be interrupted by turning the  
key to steering lock position 0.  
The key can only be removed with the selector lever in  
position “P”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic transmission  
The automatic transmission selects individual gears  
automatically, dependent upon  
Selector lever position  
Accelerator position  
Vehicle speed  
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted,  
dependent on the driving style, the driving situation  
and the road characteristics.  
Important!  
When parking the vehicle or before working on the  
vehicle with the engine running, firmly depress the  
parking brake pedal and shift the selector lever into “P”.  
Automatic transmission  
165  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Driving  
166  
Important!  
The selector lever is automatically locked while in  
position “P”. To move the selector lever out of  
position “P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly  
depressed before the shift lock will release.  
After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”,  
wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before  
accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.  
Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the  
engine is idling normally and the service brake is  
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive.  
The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the  
selector lever is in drive or reverse position.  
Accelerator position  
Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration  
Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration  
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full  
throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum  
acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up  
on the accelerator – the transmission shifts up again.  
Warning!  
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”  
or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.  
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the  
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in  
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and  
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear  
when the engine is idling normally and when your  
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.  
Stopping  
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the  
transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service  
brake.  
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N”  
or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.  
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not  
hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids  
unnecessary transmission heat build up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maneuvering  
Warning!  
To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a  
parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually  
releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never  
abruptly step on the accelerator.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move  
the gear selector lever from position “P”, which  
could result in an accident or serious injury.  
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),  
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying  
slight partial throttle.  
Towing a trailer  
Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the  
ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to  
come on. Turn off and restart the engine to clear the  
malfunction indication.  
If the transmission hunts between gears on inclines,  
manually shift to a lower gear (select “4”, “3”, “2”  
or “1”). A lower gear and reduction of speed reduces the  
chance of engine overloading and/or overheating.  
Warning!  
At very steep inclines, not manageable with selector  
lever in position “1”, switch transfer case to LOW  
RANGE, see page 209 for instructions on how to engage  
LOW RANGE.  
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever  
not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous.  
Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone  
may not prevent your vehicle from moving,  
possibly hitting people or objects.  
For instructions on trailer towing refer to page 190.  
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting  
to position “P”, see page 173 for parking brake.  
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel  
against curb.  
Automatic transmission  
167  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Selector lever position  
168  
Park position  
The park position is to be used when parking the  
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped.  
The park position is not intended to serve as a  
brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the  
driver should always use the parking brake in  
addition to placing the selector lever in park to  
secure the vehicle.  
Notes:  
The key can only be removed from the steering  
lock with the selector lever in position “P”. With  
the key removed, the selector lever is locked in  
position “P”.  
With a malfunction in the vehicle’s electrical  
system the selector lever could remain locked in  
position “P”. To unlock the selector lever  
manually, see page 259.  
The current selector lever position is indicated in the  
gear range indicator display. The automatic gear  
shifting process can be adapted to specific operating  
conditions using the selector lever.  
Reverse gear  
Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle  
stopped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Neutral  
Gear selection for special circumstances  
No power is transmitted from the engine to the  
drive axle. When the brakes are released, the  
vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do  
not engage “N” while driving except to coast  
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on  
icy roads, see winter driving instructions on  
page 180).  
The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances  
can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the  
right or the left with the selector lever in position “D”.  
The gear range currently selected is indicated in the  
instrument cluster display.  
Briefly press selector lever in the ç direction:  
The transmission downshifts, one gear at a time, in the  
order “4”, “3”, “2”, “1”.  
Important!  
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other  
reason with selector lever in “N” can result in  
transmission damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Press and hold selector lever in the ç direction:  
The selector lever position display will switch to the  
gear range currently selected by the automatic  
transmission.  
The transmission automatically upshifts through  
5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving  
characteristics under all normal operating  
conditions.  
The transmission will only shift down one gear if the  
gear range currently selected has already shifted to its  
highest possible gear.  
Briefly press selector lever in the æ direction:  
The transmission will shift from the current gear range  
to the next higher gear range. If the transmission is  
already in gear range “D”, an additional upshift of one  
gear is possible.  
Automatic transmission  
169  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
170  
Press and hold selector lever in the æ direction:  
The transmission will shift from the current gear  
directly to gear range “D”.  
During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift  
and increased engine noise might be perceived as a  
malfunction. However, neither the engine nor  
transmission are negatively affected by this mode of  
operation.  
Warning!  
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds  
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine  
temperatures below 95°F (35°C).  
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order  
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive  
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your  
vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of  
control.  
To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever  
is moved to a lower gear range, the transmission will not  
shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s revolutions per  
minute limit would be exceeded. In this case there will  
be no downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches  
the engine’s RPM limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the  
service brakes. Continue driving in the usual manner.  
The transmission will then shift down automatically.  
Important!  
With transmission in gear range “D”, “4” or “3”,  
upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed  
depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature.  
This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more  
quickly to operating temperatures.  
To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when  
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily  
loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when  
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best  
torque range.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gear ranges:  
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for  
Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in  
mountainous regions or under extreme operating  
conditions. This gear selection will allow use of  
the engine’s braking power when descending  
steep grades.  
performance driving.  
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for  
moderately steep hills. Since the transmission  
does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear  
selection will allow use of the engine’s braking  
power downhill.  
Use this position, which makes maximum use of  
the engine’s braking effect, while descending  
very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at  
speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).  
Automatic transmission  
171  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
172  
Emergency operation (Limp home mode)  
To engage 2nd gear or reverse:  
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no  
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating  
in Limp home mode which engages when there is a  
malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be  
accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.  
3. Turn off the engine.  
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.  
5. Restart the engine.  
In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be  
activated.  
6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or  
move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).  
Have the transmission checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parking brake  
To release the parking brake, pull handle (2) on  
instrument panel. The brake warning lamp É in the  
instrument cluster should go out.  
A warning sounds, if you start to drive without having  
released the parking brake.  
Also see brake warning lamp on page 219.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could  
release the parking brake, which could result in an  
accident or serious injury.  
To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal (1).  
When the key is in steering lock position 2, the brake  
warning lamp É in the instrument cluster should  
come on brightly.  
Parking brake  
173  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Driving instructions  
174  
Drinking and driving  
Warning!  
Drive sensibly – save fuel  
Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very  
dangerous combination. Even a small amount of  
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,  
perceptions and judgement.  
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving  
habits and operating conditions.  
To save fuel you should:  
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is  
sharply increased when you drink or take drugs  
and drive.  
keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,  
remove unnecessary loads,  
remove roof rack when not in use,  
allow engine to warm up under low load use,  
avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,  
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow  
anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs.  
Pedals  
have all maintenance work performed at regular  
intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center.  
Warning!  
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects  
stored in this area may impair pedal movement.  
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold  
weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly  
country.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power assistance  
Warning!  
The condition of the parking brake system is checked  
each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required  
maintenance service.  
If the parking brake is released and the brake warning  
lamp in the instrument cluster stays on and there is no  
audible warning (EBP), the brake fluid level in the  
reservoir is too low.  
When the engine is not running, the brake and  
steering systems are without power assistance.  
Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is  
necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.  
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the  
reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.  
Brakes  
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately.  
Warning!  
After driving in heavy rain for some time without  
applying the brakes or through water deep enough  
to wet brake components, the first braking action  
may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal  
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected  
braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance  
from vehicles in front.  
All checks and service work on the brake system should  
be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center.  
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by  
Mercedes-Benz.  
Warning!  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause  
excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.  
If other than recommended brake pads are  
installed, or other than recommended brake fluid  
is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be  
degraded to an extent that safe braking is  
substantially impaired. This could result in an  
accident.  
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby  
significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may  
not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time  
to avoid an accident.  
Driving instructions  
175  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Caution!  
176  
Parking  
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the  
load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use  
the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent  
Warning!  
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of  
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine  
and leaving the vehicle, always:  
overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.  
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some  
time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream  
will cool down the brakes faster.  
1. Keep right foot on the service brake pedal.  
2. Firmly depress parking brake pedal.  
3. Move the selector lever to position “P”.  
4. Slowly release the service brake pedal.  
5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.  
Driving off  
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after  
driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road  
is clear of other traffic.  
6. Turn the key to steering lock position 0 and  
remove.  
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on  
the engine until the operating temperature has been  
reached.  
7. Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.  
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one  
drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP  
switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the  
drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
Important!  
It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever  
parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move  
selector lever to position “P”.  
When parking on hills, always set the parking brake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires  
Warning!  
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride  
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to  
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the  
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and  
drive with caution to an area which is a safe  
distance from the roadway.  
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible  
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have  
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center or tire dealer for repairs.  
Warning!  
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These  
indicators are located in six places on the tread  
circumference and become visible at a tread depth of  
approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is  
considered worn and should be replaced.  
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As  
tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the  
adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply  
reduced.  
Depending upon the weather and/or road surface  
(conditions), the tire traction varies widely.  
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across  
the tread.  
Driving instructions  
177  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
178  
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This  
applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high  
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient  
temperatures).  
Tire traction  
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is  
always lower than on a dry road.  
You should pay particular attention to the condition of  
the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to  
the freezing point.  
Warning!  
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the  
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose  
control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat  
tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will  
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.  
Warning!  
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be  
substantially reduced. Under such weather  
conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme  
caution.  
Aquaplaning  
Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road,  
aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with  
new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in  
the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.  
We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires with a  
minimum tread depth of approximately 1/8 in (4 mm)  
for the winter season for all four wheels to insure  
normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed  
snow, they can reduce your stopping distance as  
compared with summer tires. Stopping distance,  
however, is still considerably greater than when the  
road is not snow or ice covered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire speed rating  
Snow chains  
ML 320 and ML 430:  
Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended  
by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this  
subject.  
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “H”-rated tires,  
which have a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h).  
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from  
exceeding the tire speed rating.  
Snow chains should be used on all four wheels. With  
only two chains available, they should be mounted on  
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting  
instructions.  
ML 55 AMG:  
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “W”-rated tires,  
which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h).  
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered  
roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).  
Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on  
roads without snow.  
Despite the tire rating, local speed limits should be  
obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to  
prevailing conditions.  
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control  
switch to OFF, refer to page 207.  
Warning!  
Even when permitted by law, never operate a  
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed  
rating of the tires.  
Model ML 55 AMG  
Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire size  
285/50 R 18.  
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are  
rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of  
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury  
and possible death.  
Driving instructions  
179  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Winter driving instructions  
180  
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated  
roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as  
possible after driving is resumed while observing the  
safety rules in the previous paragraph.  
The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to  
drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking  
and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control  
system under such conditions.  
Warning!  
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move  
selector lever to position “N”. Try to keep the vehicle  
under control by corrective steering action.  
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure  
that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and  
from around the vehicle with engine running.  
Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may  
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness  
and death.  
Caution!  
Do not use LOW RANGE mode when driving on ice or  
packed snow. At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h)  
vehicle steering is adversely affected by the LOW  
RANGE ABS.  
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a  
window slightly on the side of the vehicle not  
facing the wind.  
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking  
efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary  
to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore  
recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically  
when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can  
bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to  
normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done  
without endangering other drivers on the road.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Winter driving  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
antilock brake system (ABS), the four wheel electronic  
traction system (4-ETS+), the electronic stability  
program (ESP), and electronic brake proportioning  
(EBP) can only be achieved with M+S rated radial-ply  
tires and/or snow chains recommended by  
Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before the onset of  
winter.  
Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil  
which is not approved for winter operation. For  
viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity,  
see page 292.  
Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance.  
For driving instructions using snow chains see  
page 179.  
Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze  
concentration.  
Deep water  
Caution!  
Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp  
cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a  
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze  
which is formulated for below freezing temperatures  
see page 237.  
Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown  
depth. Before driving through water, determine its  
depth. It should not be deeper than approximately  
20 inches (50 cm).  
Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing  
ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps  
to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low  
ambient temperatures.  
If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to  
prevent water from entering the engine compartment or  
passenger compartment, being ingested by the air  
intake, possibly causing damage to electrical  
components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is  
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on  
all four wheels for the winter season. Observe  
permissible maximum speed for M+S rated  
radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit.  
Driving instructions  
181  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Passenger compartment  
182  
Traveling abroad  
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service  
network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas  
which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center directory, you should request  
pertinent information from your authorized  
Warning!  
Always fasten items being carried as securely as  
possible.  
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden  
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around  
inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle  
occupants unless the items are securely fastened in  
the vehicle.  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.  
Block heater (Canada only)  
The engine is equipped with a block heater.  
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road driving  
Important!  
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle characteristics and  
gear changing before you attempt any difficult terrain  
off-road driving. We recommend that you start out with  
easy off-road travel.  
Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain. The more  
uneven, rutty and steeper the terrain, the lower the  
speed should be.  
Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,  
tree-stumps, ruts.  
Please read this chapter carefully before you begin  
off-road travel.  
Be especially careful when driving in unknown  
territory. Eventually get out of the vehicle and scout the  
path you intend to take.  
Special driving features are available for specific kinds  
of operation:  
LOW RANGE mode, see page 209  
LOW RANGE - ABS, see page 202  
LOW RANGE - 4-ETS+, see page 204  
LOW RANGE - ESP, see page 208  
Continuous and speedy driving in sandy soil overcomes  
the vehicle rolling resistance, and helps to prevent the  
vehicle from sinking into the ground.  
Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It interrupts the  
forward momentum of the vehicle.  
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having friction  
property, can cause exceptional wear and tear as well as  
failure of the brakes.  
Engage the LOW RANGE mode before driving under  
off-road conditions. For switching LOW RANGE mode on  
and off see page 209.  
In this case the brakes may be less effective or even fail  
when you most need them. Always clean and check the  
brakes following each off-road trip.  
Fasten items being carried as securely as possible, see  
page 136.  
We recommend to keep doors, liftgate, windows, and  
roof closed whenever driving in off-road mode.  
Driving instructions  
183  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Checklist before off-road driving  
184  
Driving in steep terrain  
• Tires: Check the tread depth and maintain specified  
tire pressure (see tire pressure label inside the fuel  
filler flap). Check tires for possible damage and  
remove foreign objects. The valve caps must be  
mounted.  
• Rims: Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure  
loss and damage the tire beads. For this reason  
change rims before driving off-road.  
1
2
• Vehicle tool kit: Check if the vehicle jack is  
functional. In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a  
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put  
under the vehicle jack on sandy soil) with you.  
Slope angle:  
1 26° (ML 320 and ML 430)  
23° (ML 55 AMG)  
2 26° (ML 320 and ML 430)  
21° (ML 55 AMG)  
Switch to LOW RANGE mode before starting to drive up  
or down steep inclines, see page 209.  
Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 60% grade.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving on embankments, slopes and other steep  
inclines should only be done straight up or downhill, i.e.  
in the line of gravity.  
Traction in steep terrain:  
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for continuous  
wheel traction when driving in steep terrain.  
Do not drive along the side of a slope (danger of vehicle  
rollover). If in doing so, the vehicle begins to show a  
tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity  
(straight up or downhill).  
The 4-ETS+ helps greatly when starting out on a steep  
incline. The front wheels have then the tendency to slip  
due to the weight reduction over the front axle. The ETS  
recognizes the situation and limits the torque for the  
front wheels by braking them. Simultaneously the  
torque for the rear wheels is increased.  
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never turn it  
around on steep inclines. If the vehicle cannot complete  
the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.  
See page 203 for four wheel electronic traction system  
(4-ETS+).  
Utilize the engine’s braking power when descending a  
slope, observe the engine speed (do not overrev the  
engine). Apply the service brake as needed.  
Driving across a hilltop:  
Check the brakes after a lengthy downgrade drive.  
To prevent the vehicle from speeding up too much after  
climbing a hill, decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not  
select gear range “N”). Use the momentum of the  
vehicle to drive across the hilltop. Driving in this  
manner prevents the vehicle from jumping across the  
hilltop and thus loosing its forward momentum.  
Notes:  
Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive with moderate  
engine speeds (max. 3000 RPM).  
Select gear range “2” or “1” on the automatic  
transmission, see page 165.  
Driving instructions  
185  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Driving downhill:  
186  
Utilize the engine’s braking power when descending a  
slope, observe the engine speed (do not overrev the  
engine). Apply the service brake as needed.  
Select gear range “1” on the automatic transmission,  
see page 165.  
The special low range ABS setting allows for precise and  
brief (cyclical) blocking of the front wheels, permitting  
them to dig into loose ground. Remember that the front  
wheels when stopped, slide across a surface, thus loose  
their ability to steer the vehicle.  
Drive downhill observing the same rules as driving  
uphill.  
Driving on embankments, slopes and other steep  
inclines should only be done straight up or downhill, i.e.  
in the line of gravity.  
Check the brakes after a lengthy downgrade drive.  
Do not drive along the side of a slope (danger of vehicle  
rollover). If in doing so, the vehicle begins to show a  
tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity  
(straight up or downhill).  
Important!  
Only apply the service brake if the vehicle travels  
straight downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving through water  
Switch to LOW RANGE mode before driving through  
water.  
Switch off the exterior lamps as well as the climate  
control.  
Enter the water only at a shallow spot. Never take a  
running start. Drive slowly, avoiding a bow wave.  
Do not stop vehicle immersed in water, and do not shut  
off the engine.  
To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the brake pedal  
several times after leaving the water.  
1 20 in (50 cm)  
Before driving through water, determine its depth. It  
should not be deeper than approximately  
20 inches (50 cm).  
Driving instructions  
187  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
188  
Notes:  
Check the vehicle clearance before crossing obstacles  
that possibly could damage the undercarriage.  
If possible use the assistance of a second person.  
Special attention is needed when crossing obstacles on  
a steep incline. The vehicle could slide sideways as a  
result of its possible slanted position.  
Ruts:  
Select gear range “1” on the automatic transmission,  
see page 165.  
A number of off-road tracks or other byways have deep  
ruts which can cause the undercarriage to come in  
contact with the ground.  
Crossing obstacles:  
Select gear range “1” on the automatic transmission,  
see page 165.  
Drive next to the ruts rather than through them if at all  
possible.  
Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big rocks) very  
slowly by aiming one of the front wheels at the center of  
the obstacle, and repeat same with the rear wheel.  
Notes:  
Check the vehicle clearance.  
Important!  
Damage on the vehicle definitely increases the chance  
for a subsequent accident.  
Damage on the vehicle definitely increases the chance  
for a subsequent accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Returning from off-road driving  
Check for brush or branches caught in the  
undercarriage. They could increase the possibility of  
a fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake lines,  
puncture rubber bellows of the axles or drive shafts.  
Off-road driving increases strain on the vehicle.  
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle for possible  
damage after each off-road trip. Recognizing any  
damage and a subsequent timely repair reduces the  
chance of a possible breakdown or accident later on.  
Warning!  
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride  
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to  
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the  
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and  
drive with caution to an area which is a safe  
distance from the roadway.  
Proceed as follows:  
Switch off the LOW RANGE mode, see page 209.  
Remove excessive dirt from tires, wheels, wheel  
housings, and underbody. For instance, after driving  
in mud, clean the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,  
and wheels from extreme dirt, using a strong jet of  
water.  
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible  
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have  
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center or tire dealer for repairs.  
Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses, etc., as well as  
vehicle underbody for possible damage.  
Check tires for possible damage, clean all exterior  
lamps, and conduct a brake test.  
Driving instructions  
189  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Trailer towing  
190  
Trailer Hitches  
Only install a trailer hitch receiver approved for your  
vehicle. For information on availability and installation,  
please see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center.  
Warning!  
Failure to use proper equipment and driving  
technique can result in a loss of vehicle control  
when towing a trailer.  
The bumpers on your vehicle are not designed for use  
with clamp-type hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or  
other bumper-type hitches to them.  
Improper towing or failure to follow the  
instructions contained in this guide can result in  
serious injury. Follow the guidelines below  
carefully to assure safe trailer operation.  
To reduce the possibility of damage, remove the hitch  
ball adaptor from the receiver when not in use.  
Ask your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center should you require an explanation of  
information contained in this guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical connections  
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings  
The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-wire harness  
included in the Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch  
receiver kit. An additional four-pole conversion plug is  
included in the Mercedes-Benz supplied trailer hitch  
receiver kit. For further information, please see your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the maximum  
permissible vehicle weight: 6005 lbs. (2724 kg)  
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW): comprises weight of  
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed  
accessories, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It  
must never exceed the GVWR.  
In order to prevent possible damage to the vehicle’s  
electrical system by incorrectly installing the trailer  
wiring plug, we recommend having the harness  
connected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center.  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum  
permissible axle weight:  
front  
rear  
2755 lbs. (1250 kg)  
3527 lbs. (1600 kg)  
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the maximum  
permissible trailer weight to be towed:  
5000 lbs. (2260 kg)  
Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the maximum  
permissible weight of the trailer tongue:  
[500 lbs. (225 kg) limit for MB approved hitch receiver]  
Driving instructions  
191  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Loading a trailer  
192  
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer  
When loading a trailer, you should observe that neither  
the permissible GTW, nor the GVWR are exceeded.  
To assure that the tow vehicle and trailer are in  
compliance with the maximum permissible weight  
limits, and to know the actual weights, have the loaded  
rig (tow vehicle including driver, passengers and cargo,  
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a commercial scale.  
Maximum permissible values are listed on the safety  
compliance certification labels for the vehicle and for  
the trailer to be towed. The lowest value listed must be  
selected when determining how the vehicle and trailer  
are loaded.  
Check the vehicle’s front and rear Gross Axle Weight  
(GAW), the GTW and TW. The values as measured must  
not be exceeded, according to the weight listed under  
“Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings”.  
We recommend loading the trailer in such a manner  
that it has a tongue weight (TW) between 10% and 15%  
of the GTW.  
The tongue weight at the hitch ball must be added to the  
GVW to prevent exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow  
vehicle’s rear GAWR.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching a trailer  
Caution!  
Please observe maximum permitted trailer dimensions  
(width and length).  
Do not connect a trailer brake system (if trailer is so  
equipped) directly to the vehicle’s hydraulic brake  
system, as your vehicle is equipped with antilock  
brakes. If you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the  
trailer’s brakes will function properly.  
Most states and all Canadian provinces require safety  
chains between your tow vehicle and the trailer. The  
chains should be crisscrossed under the trailer tongue.  
They must be attached to the hitch receiver, and not to  
the vehicle’s bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough  
slack in the chains to permit turning corners.  
The provided vehicle electrical wiring harness for trailer  
towing has a brake signal wire (color orange) for  
hook-up to a brake controller.  
Most states and all Canadian provinces require a  
separate brake system at various trailer weights.  
Most states and all Canadian provinces require a  
break-away switch on trailers with a separate brake  
system. The switch activates the trailer brakes in the  
possible event that the trailer might separate from the  
tow vehicle.  
You should consider using a trailer sway control system.  
For further information see your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Driving instructions  
193  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Towing a trailer  
194  
The vehicle and trailer combination is heavier, and  
therefore is limited in acceleration and climbing ability,  
and requires longer stopping distances. It is more prone  
to reacting to side wind gusts, and requires more  
sensitive steering input.  
There are many different laws, including speed limit  
restrictions, having to do with trailer towing. Make sure  
that your rig will be legal, not only for where you reside,  
but also for where you will be driving. A good source for  
this information can be the police or local authorities.  
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the  
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,  
stopping and backing up in an area which is free from  
traffic.  
Before you start driving with the trailer, check the  
trailer hitch, break-away switch, safety chains, electrical  
connections, lighting and tires. Also adjust the mirrors  
to permit unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.  
If possible, do not brake abruptly, but rather engage the  
brake slightly at first to permit the trailer to activate its  
brake. Then increase the braking force.  
If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and  
trailer moving slowly, and then apply only the trailer  
brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are  
working properly.  
Caution!  
If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce the vehicle’s  
speed and use the brake controller by hand to straighten  
out the vehicle and trailer. In no case should you  
attempt to straighten out the tow vehicle and trailer by  
increasing the speed or oversteering and stepping on  
the brakes.  
When towing a trailer, check occasionally to be sure that  
the load is secure, and that lighting and trailer brakes  
(if so equipped) are functioning properly.  
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts  
while driving.  
Take into consideration that when towing a trailer, the  
handling characteristics are different and less stable  
from those when operating the vehicle without a trailer.  
It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.  
If the transmission hunts between gears on inclines,  
manually shift to a lower gear (select “4”, “3”, “2”  
or “1”). A lower gear and reduction of speed reduces the  
chance of engine overloading and/or overheating.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
At very steep inclines, not manageable with selector  
lever in position “1”, switch transfer case to LOW  
RANGE, see page 209 for instructions on how to engage  
LOW RANGE.  
Parking  
Warning!  
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or damage to  
the vehicle powertrain, as a result of vehicle/trailer  
movement, always:  
When going down a long hill, shift into a lower gear and  
use the engine’s braking effect. Avoid riding the brakes,  
thus overheating the vehicle and trailer brakes.  
1. Keep right foot on brake pedal.  
If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high  
temperature (coolant temperature needle approaching  
the red zone) when the air conditioner is on, turn off the  
air conditioner. Engine coolant heat can be additionally  
vented by opening the windows, switching the climate  
control fan speed to high and setting the temperature  
control to the maximum hot position.  
2. Shift gear selector lever to position “N”.  
3. Have a second person place wheel chocks on  
downhill side of left and right trailer wheels.  
4. Slowly release brake pedal and let vehicle and  
trailer roll into chocks until stopped.  
5. Firmly depress parking brake pedal.  
6. Move gear selector lever to position “P”.  
Extreme care must be exercised since your vehicle with  
a trailer will require additional passing distance ahead  
than when driving without a trailer. Because your  
vehicle and trailer is longer than your vehicle alone, you  
will also need to go much farther ahead of the passed  
vehicle before you can return to your lane.  
7. On inclines turn front wheels towards the road  
curb.  
Driving instructions  
195  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
196  
Cruise control  
1 Accelerate and set:  
Lift lever briefly to set speed.  
Hold lever up to accelerate.  
1
2 Decelerate and set:  
Depress lever briefly to set speed.  
Hold lever down to decelerate.  
3
Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired  
speed with the accelerator.  
Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to  
position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be  
released.  
4
The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by  
using the accelerator. After the accelerator is  
released, the previously set speed will be resumed  
automatically.  
2
The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed  
manner, for example over long distances, as it  
automatically maintains the set speed by actively  
regulating the throttle setting.  
If a set speed is to be increased or decreased  
slightly, e.g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in  
position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or  
briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for  
increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  
increments. When the lever is released, the newly  
set speed remains.  
Any given speed above approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by  
operating the lever.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Canceling  
Important!  
To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to  
position 3.  
Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the  
cruise control off.  
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle  
speed drops below approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h), for example when driving upgrade, the  
cruise control will be canceled.  
Warning!  
Only use the cruise control if the traffic and  
weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a  
steady speed.  
If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains  
inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the  
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  
winding roads or in heavy traffic because  
conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady  
speed.  
4 Resume  
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion  
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.  
If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when  
driving at a speed exceeding approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which  
was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise  
control. The last memorized speed is canceled when  
the key in the steering lock is turned to position 1  
or 0.  
The “Resume” function should only be operated if  
the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed  
and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.  
Driving systems  
197  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
198  
Notes:  
Transmission in LOW RANGE mode  
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently  
while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the  
cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the  
automatic transmission shifts down (max. to 3rd gear)  
to maintain the set cruise control speed by using the  
engine’s braking power.  
The cruise control should not be activated during off-  
road driving in the LOW RANGE mode. Doing so could  
reduce driving comfort.  
Trailer operation  
When towing a trailer, do not allow engine speed to drop  
too low on inclines. Select a lower range (“3”, “2” or “1”)  
in time, depending on the degree of the incline. This is  
also valid with cruise control activated.  
As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission  
shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.  
Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the  
brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control  
is switched off.  
At extreme inclines switch to LOW RANGE mode, see  
page 209.  
Use the lever to resume the previously set speed.  
Note:  
For detailed information see trailer towing on page 190.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake assist system (BAS)  
Warning!  
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking  
capability during emergency braking maneuvers by  
having maximum power boost applied to the brakes  
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than  
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s  
braking style. This can help reduce braking distances  
over what ordinary driving and braking style might do.  
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).  
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase  
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the  
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the  
traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, following another vehicle too  
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and  
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The  
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never  
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the  
safety of others.  
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum  
BAS assistance.  
To receive the benefit of the system you must apply  
continuous full braking power during the stopping  
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.  
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the electronic  
stability program (ESP) is combined with the BAS  
malfunction indicator lamp.  
Driving systems  
199  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
200  
The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in steering  
lock position 2 and should go out with the engine  
running.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the BAS and  
the ESP are switched off. When the voltage is above this  
value again, the malfunction indicator lamp should go  
out and the BAS is operational.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
permanently while the engine is running, a malfunction  
has been detected in either system. As a result, it is  
possible that now only partial engine output will be  
available. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system  
functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS is also switched  
off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on with the  
engine running.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp stays  
illuminated, have the BAS or ESP checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon  
as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Antilock brake system (ABS)  
Warning!  
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep  
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this  
manner only can the ABS be most effective.  
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even  
with light brake pedal pressure because of the  
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating  
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road  
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra  
care while driving.  
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm,  
steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake  
pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly  
reduces braking effectiveness.  
Important!  
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during  
hard braking maneuvers.  
ABS control  
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in steering  
lock position 2 and should go out with the engine  
running.  
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a  
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)  
independent of road surface conditions.  
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a  
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,  
indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep  
firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while  
experiencing the pulsation.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the  
instrument cluster comes on while the engine is  
running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a  
malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake  
system functions in the usual manner, but without  
antilock assistance.  
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in  
applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking  
power and ability to steer the vehicle.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS, EBP, ESP and  
4-ETS+ are also switched off. The malfunction indicator  
lamps come on with the engine running.  
Driving systems  
201  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
202  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
ABS is operational.  
Notes:  
To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions  
you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as  
appropriate.  
Operating the vehicle on a single axle dynamometer  
should only be done for briefly testing the brakes. To do  
so, move selector lever to position “N”. The engine must  
be shut off (key in steering lock position 0 or 1).  
If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated,  
have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
Warning!  
LOW RANGE – ABS  
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase  
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded  
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or  
the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, following another vehicle too  
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and  
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The  
capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never  
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the  
safety of others.  
During off-road driving a special low range system for  
the antilock brake system (ABS) is operational with  
transmission in LOW RANGE mode, see page 211.  
When applying the service brakes at speeds below  
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are  
locked cyclically to shorten the braking distance (dig in  
effect). This affects steering the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Four-wheel electronic traction system (4-ETS+)  
4-ETS+ Control  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the yellow  
4-ETS+ malfunction indicator lamp { and the 4-ETS+  
warning lamp v come on and should go out when  
the engine is running.  
If the yellow 4-ETS+ malfunction indicator lamp {  
comes on while the 4-ETS+ warning lamp v flashes,  
the electronic traction system is being switched off  
temporarily to prevent overheating of the drive wheel  
brakes.  
The 4-ETS+ improves vehicle’s ability to utilize available  
traction, especially under slippery road conditions. The  
brakes are applied to the spinning wheel and power is  
transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.  
If the 4-ETS+ malfunction indicator lamp { comes on  
with the engine running, a malfunction has been  
detected.  
The 4-ETS+ warning lamp v, located in the  
speedometer dial, starts to flash at any vehicle speed, as  
soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to  
spin.  
Have the 4-ETS+ checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the 4-ETS+ is also  
switched off.  
Important!  
Caution!  
If the 4-ETS+ warning lamp v flashes:  
during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible,  
while driving, ease up on the accelerator.  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see  
towing the vehicle on page 255), or when testing the  
parking brake on a brake test dynamometer, the engine  
must be shut off (key in steering lock position 0 or 1).  
Otherwise, the electronic traction system will  
immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel  
brakes.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
Driving systems  
203  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
204  
Note:  
Electronic brake proportioning (EBP)  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
electronic traction system is only achieved with  
Mercedes-Benz recommended M+S rated radial-ply tires  
and/or snow chains.  
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the  
rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking  
effort without a loss of vehicle stability.  
If a warning tone sounds for five seconds and the  
symbols É and - are displayed in the instrument  
cluster, the system has detected a malfunction and is  
switched off. Have the system checked immediately at  
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Failure to do so could result in an accident, since the  
enhanced braking effect is not available when the  
system is switched off.  
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS+  
During off-road driving a special low range system for  
the four wheel electronic traction system (4-ETS+) is  
operational with transmission in LOW RANGE mode,  
see page 211.  
If one or more tires lose traction while driving downhill  
(accelerator released), the 4-ETS+ engages and the  
warning lamp v, located in the speedometer dial,  
starts to flash.  
Note:  
When the EBP is switched off, every time the engine is  
started, a warning tone will sound for five seconds and  
the symbols É and - will light up. In addition,  
whenever the brakes are applied at speeds exceeding  
25 mph (40 km/h), the warning tone sounds for five  
seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electronic stability program (ESP)  
Warning!  
Important!  
If the ESP warning lamp v flashes:  
During take-off apply as little throttle as possible.  
While driving ease up on the accelerator.  
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the  
traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe,  
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.  
The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must  
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or  
the safety of others.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
Do not switch off the ESP.  
Caution!  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see  
towing the vehicle on page 255), the engine must be  
shut off (key in steering lock position 0 or 1). Otherwise,  
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the  
rear wheel brakes.  
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces  
driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving  
conditions.  
Over-/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by  
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a  
countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also  
limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the  
speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in  
operation.  
Notes:  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined  
with that of the BAS.  
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp ¿  
in the instrument cluster and the yellow ESP warning  
lamp v in the speedometer dial come on with the  
key in steering lock position 2. They should go out with  
the engine running.  
Driving systems  
205  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
206  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp ¿ comes  
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction  
has been detected in either system. Only partial engine  
output will be available.  
When testing the parking brake on a brake test  
dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise,  
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the  
rear wheel brakes.  
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in  
the usual manner, but without BAS.  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended  
M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp stays  
illuminated, have the BAS or ESP checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon  
as possible.  
Synchronizing ESP  
If the power supply was interrupted (battery  
disconnected or empty), the BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp may be illuminated with the engine  
running.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched  
off.  
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the  
wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP  
may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp v in  
speedometer dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels,  
including the spare wheel, must have the same tire  
outside diameter.  
After driving off the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator  
lamp should go out after approximately 110 - 220 yd  
(100 - 200 m).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESP control switch  
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with  
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,  
or off-road driving, switch off ESP by pressing the upper  
half of the ESP switch. The ESP warning lamp v,  
located in the speedometer dial, is continuously  
illuminated.  
Warning!  
ESP should not be switched off during normal  
driving other than in circumstances described  
above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle  
stability in standard driving maneuvers.  
When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated  
continuously, the ESP is switched off.  
P54.25-2037-26  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
ESP control switch located in center console.  
To switch ESP off, press upper half of switch.  
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer dial,  
comes on.  
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque  
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced  
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.  
To switch ESP on again, press lower half of switch.  
ESP warning lamp v, located in speedometer dial,  
goes out.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with  
the switch in the OFF position.  
Driving systems  
207  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
208  
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the  
brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient  
traction.  
LOW RANGE – ESP  
During off-road driving a special low range system for  
the electronic stability program (ESP) is operational  
with transmission in LOW RANGE mode, see page 211.  
Note:  
In the LOW RANGE mode the electronic stability  
program (ESP) operates in a traction improving fashion  
specifically adapted for off-road driving. At speeds  
below 27 mph (45 km/h) the ESP assists in over-/  
understeering, thus improving vehicle tracking.  
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause  
serious damage to the drive train which is not covered  
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial,  
starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires  
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.  
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by  
ESP: press lower half of the switch (the ESP warning  
lamp in the speedometer dial goes out).  
Important!  
If the ESP warning lamp flashes:  
during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible,  
while driving, ease up on the accelerator.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission control – LOW RANGE mode  
Failure to do so may result in transmission/engine  
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited  
Warranty  
The LOW RANGE mode should be switched on:  
during off-road driving,  
when crossing waters.  
For additional practical hints refer to off-road driving  
on page 183.  
Switching on:  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
2. Move transmission selector lever to position “N”.  
The switch is located in the instrument panel.  
3. Push top end of switch. The LOW RANGE indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster blinks slowly during  
the changeover.  
Important!  
When switching to or from the LOW RANGE mode,  
observe the following:  
Once the changeover is complete, the indicator lamp in  
the instrument cluster lights up continuously.  
The vehicle must be at a complete standstill.  
Note:  
The engine speed must not exceed 1500 rpm.  
If the indicator lamp blinks fast, one or more switching  
conditions were not observed, or the LOW RANGE mode  
is defective.  
Driving systems  
209  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
210  
Switching off:  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
Note:  
If the indicator lamp blinks fast, one or more switching  
conditions were not observed, or the LOW RANGE mode  
is defective.  
2. Move transmission selector lever to position “N”.  
3. Push top end of switch. The LOW RANGE indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster blinks slowly during  
the changeover.  
Once the changeover is complete, the indicator lamp in  
the instrument cluster goes out. Use the gear selector  
lever normally.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Notes:  
Driving off or driving up to 3 mph (5 km/h) with the  
service brakes applied lightly (to reduce drive wheel  
spin), the 4-ETS+ remains engaged. Driving with the  
service brakes applied lightly at vehicles speeds above  
3 mph (5 km/h), the 4-ETS+ will not engage.  
During off-road driving a special low range system for  
antilock brake system (ABS) and four-wheel electronic  
traction system (4-ETS+) are operational with  
transmission in the LOW RANGE mode.  
In the low range mode the electronic stability program  
(ESP) operates in a traction improving fashion  
specifically adapted for off-road driving. At speeds  
below 27 mph (45 km/h) the ESP assists in over-/  
understeering, thus improving vehicle tracking.  
If the indicator lamp blinks fast, one or more switching  
conditions were not observed, or the LOW RANGE mode  
is defective.  
In the case of a defective in the LOW RANGE mode the  
transmission shifts in the usual manner. It is not  
possible to switch on the LOW RANGE mode.  
If one or more tires lose traction while driving downhill  
(accelerator released), the 4-ETS+ engages and the  
warning lamp v, located in the speedometer dial,  
starts to flash.  
Have the transmission checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
When applying the service brakes at speeds below  
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are  
locked cyclically to shorten the braking distance (dig in  
effect). This affects steering the vehicle.  
Driving systems  
211  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
What you should know at the gas station  
What you should know at the gas station  
212  
Open flap by pulling at rear (arrow). Turn fuel cap to the  
left and hold on to it until possible pressure in tank has  
been released, then remove cap. Failure to remove  
slowly could result in personal injury.  
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler neck. Do  
not drop the cap. It could damage the vehicle paint  
finish.  
Manual release of fuel filler flap, see page 274.  
Important!  
When refueling vehicle make certain that no gasoline  
comes into contact with plastic taillamp, to prevent  
damaging the lens.  
Fuel  
Fuel supply  
Warning!  
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully  
insert filler nozzle unit.  
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It  
burns violently and can cause serious injury.  
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling  
fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking  
materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking  
materials near gasoline!  
Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out –  
do not top up or overfill.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Coolant  
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water  
Warning!  
Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating  
pressure in the system which could cause a gas  
discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon  
removing the filler nozzle which could cause  
personal injury.  
quality).  
For further information (e.g. anticorrosion/  
antifreeze), see page 292.  
• Spark plugs  
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate.  
Approved spark plugs, see page 290.  
• Tire pressure  
Fuel tank capacity approximately 19.0 US gal (72.0 l).  
This includes approximately 3.2 US gal (12.0 l) reserve.  
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside  
the fuel filler flap. See page 250 for further details.  
Use premium unleaded gasoline: Posted Octane  
Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON).  
• Air conditioner  
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant, see  
page 294.  
• Engine oil  
Engine oil level check, see page 89 and page 233.  
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick  
marking level: 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).  
Recommended engine oils, see Approved Service  
Products sheet.  
What you should know at the gas station  
213  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
What you should know at the gas station  
• Bulbs  
214  
high beam: H1 U (55 W),  
low beam: H7 (55 W)  
low beam: Xenon D2R - 35 W (optional)  
fog lamps (optional): H3 U (55 W),  
turn signal, parking, side marker and standing  
lamps, front: 1157 (32/3 cp),  
turn signal lamp, side: W 5 W (168 [3 cp]),  
stop lamps: P 21 W (1073 [32 cp]),  
backup lamps: P 21 W (1073 [32 cp]),  
turn signal lamps, rear: P Y 21 W,  
tail, parking, side marker, standing, and rear fog  
lamp, driver’s side: P 21/4 W,  
license plate lamps: C 5 W (tubular),  
high mounted stop lamp: P 21 W (1073 [32 cp]).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check regularly and before a long trip  
1 Engine oil level  
See “Checking engine oil level” on page 233 and  
“Engine oil level indicator” on page 89.  
2 Coolant level  
See “Coolant level” on page 234.  
3 Brake fluid  
See “Brake fluid” on page 294.  
4 Windshield washer system/  
Headlamp cleaning system/  
Rear window washer system  
For refilling reservoir see page 236.  
Opening hood, see page 231.  
Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For  
replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on  
page 260.  
Exterior lamp switch, see page 90.  
Check regulary and before a long trip  
215  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electronic stability  
program (ESP) / Electronic  
traction system (ETS) –  
warning lamp ............................. 221  
BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 221  
4-ETS malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 221  
LOW RANGE  
indicator lamp ............................ 221  
Adjustable steering wheel –  
indicator lamp .............................222  
AIRBAG OFF  
indicator lamp .............................222  
Seat belt warning lamp .............223  
Charge indicator lamp ...............223  
Low engine oil level  
warning lamp ..............................224  
Low engine coolant  
level warning ..............................224  
Brake pad wear  
indicator lamp .............................225  
Instrument cluster display  
Malfunction and indicator  
lamps in the  
instrument cluster .................... 218  
On-board diagnostic system –  
Check engine malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................. 218  
Brake warning lamp .................. 219  
Supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) indicator lamp .................. 219  
Fuel reserve warning .................220  
ABS malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 222  
FSS indicator ...............................225  
Contents - Instrument cluster display  
Instruments  
217  
Instrument  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
and controls  
cluster display  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
218  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
in the instrument cluster  
out of fuel), serious damage can occur to the emission  
system. Please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center immediately.  
General information:  
The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control  
module monitors emission control components that  
either provide input signals to or receive output signals  
from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from  
interruptions or failure of any of these components are  
indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are  
simultaneously stored in the SFI control module.  
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up  
during the bulb self-check when turning the key in  
steering lock to position 2, have it checked and replaced  
if necessary.  
On-board diagnostic system  
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp  
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the  
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator  
lamp comes on when the engine is running,  
CHECK  
ENGINE  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp  
comes on, have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management  
system, emission control system, systems which impact  
emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the  
fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated  
continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you  
may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we  
recommend that you have the system checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon  
as possible.  
With some exceptions, the control module switches off  
the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the  
condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists  
during three consecutive cycles. See also page 220 for  
fuel cap placement warning.  
An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the  
passenger compartment near to the parking brake  
pedal, allowing the accurate identification of system  
malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble  
codes.  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuously  
and/or the vehicle is not driving normally (e.g.  
malfunction of the fuel management system or running  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake warning lamp  
When the brake warning lamp appears  
while the engine is running, this means:  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp  
The operational readiness of the airbag  
system is verified by the indicator lamp  
SRS  
BRAKE  
“SRS” in the instrument cluster when  
turning the key in steering lock to position 1 or 2. If no  
fault is detected, the lamp will go out after  
approximately 5 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the  
system continues to monitor the components and  
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  
malfunction by coming on again.  
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir  
(engine running and parking brake released), or  
the parking brake is set (engine running)  
the electronic brake proportioning (EBP) system is  
malfunctioning.  
Warning!  
Warning!  
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated  
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be  
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated  
can result in an accident. Have your brake system  
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp  
stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the  
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir  
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine  
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be  
seriously burned.  
operational. For your safety, we strongly  
recommend that you visit an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to  
have the system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may  
not be activated when needed in an accident, which  
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might  
deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which  
could also result in injury.  
Note:  
See page 56 for notes on airbags, page 55 for belt  
tensioners, and page 65 for infant and child seat  
restraints.  
If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid  
reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for  
brake pad thickness and leaks.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
219  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Fuel reserve warning  
220  
When the warning lamp (1) comes on after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that  
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of  
approximately 3.2 gal (12 liters).  
See page 212 for notes on refueling the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electronic stability program (ESP)/Electronic  
traction system (4-ETS+) — warning lamp  
4-ETS+ malfunction indicator lamp  
The yellow ETS malfunction indicator lamp  
in the instrument cluster comes on with the  
key in steering lock position 2. It should go  
out with the engine running.  
ETS  
The yellow warning lamp in the  
speedometer dial comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2. It should go out  
with engine running.  
If the ETS malfunction indicator lamp remains  
illuminated with the engine running a malfunction has  
been detected, see page 203 for 4-ETS+.  
See page 203 for 4-ETS+ and page 205 for ESP if the  
warning lamp lights up or flashes when the vehicle is  
moving.  
LOW RANGE indicator lamp  
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp  
The yellow LOW RANGE indicator lamp in  
the instrument cluster comes on with the  
key in steering lock position 2. With the  
LOW  
RANGE  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP  
is combined with that of the BAS.  
BAS  
ESP  
LOW RANGE mode deactivated it should go out with the  
engine running.  
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2. It should go out with the engine  
running.  
With the LOW RANGE mode activated the LOW RANGE  
indicator lamp is illuminated continuously.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains  
illuminated with the engine running, see page 199 for  
BAS and page 205 for ESP.  
If the indicator lamp blinks fast, one or more switching  
conditions were not observed, or the LOW RANGE mode  
is defective, see page 209 for LOW RANGE mode.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
221  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
ABS malfunction indicator lamp  
222  
Adjustable steering wheel – indicator lamp  
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2 and should go out  
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster  
comes on with the key in steering lock  
position 2 and should go out with the engine  
running.  
ABS  
with the engine running.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on while the engine is  
running, it indicates that the ABS has detected a  
malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake  
system functions in the usual manner, but without  
antilock assistance.  
If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, the adjustable steering column is not properly  
locked.  
For locking the adjustable telescoping steering column,  
see page 70.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS, ESP and 4-ETS+  
are also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps  
come on with the engine running.  
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp  
The indicator lamp will light up for  
approximately 6 seconds, extinguish, then  
blink once, when you turn the key in  
steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
ABS is operational.  
The 7 indicator lamp stays lit as long as a  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat is properly installed  
on the front passenger seat. It indicates that the front  
passenger airbag is switched off.  
See page 53 for BabySmartTM airbag and its deactivation  
system.  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
See page 201 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS).  
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat belt warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
If the charge indicator lamp comes on while the engine  
is running, this may indicate that the poly-V-belt has  
broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-V-belt  
must be replaced before continuing to operate the  
vehicle. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an  
inoperative water pump which may result in damage to  
the engine.  
seat belt warning lamp comes on for a short  
time if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.  
After starting the engine, the warning lamp remains  
illuminated for a short time to remind the driver and  
passengers to fasten seat belts.  
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with the charge  
indicator lamp illuminated. Doing so could result in  
serious engine damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Charge indicator lamp  
Should the charge indicator lamp fail to  
come on prior to starting when the key is in  
steering lock position 2 or should it fail to go  
out after starting or during operation, this indicates a  
malfunction which must be repaired at an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
223  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Low engine oil level warning lamp  
224  
Low engine coolant level warning  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
oil level warning lamp comes on and should  
go out when the engine is running.  
When the coolant level warning lamp comes  
on while driving, then the coolant level has  
dropped below the required level, or the  
coolant temperature is in the red zone. If no leaks are  
noticeable and the engine temperature does not  
increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station  
and have coolant added to the coolant system, see  
page 234. If the engine temperature reaches the red  
zone, move vehicle to an area which is in a safe distance  
from the roadway and turn off the engine. Also see  
coolant temperature gauge on page 81.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or comes on with the engine running and at  
operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped  
to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.  
When this occurs, the warning lamp will first come on  
intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops  
further.  
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest  
service station where the engine oil should be topped to  
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.  
The low engine coolant level warning should not be  
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed  
may cause serious engine damage not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
The low engine oil level warning light should not be  
ignored. Extended driving with the light illuminated  
could result in serious engine damage that is not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have  
the cooling system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
In addition to the warning lamp, the engine oil level  
should be periodically checked with the dipstick or via  
the oil level indicator in the odometer display field, for  
example during a fuel stop, or before a long trip (see  
engine oil level indicator on page 89 and checking  
engine oil on page 233).  
Notes:  
Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The  
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.  
Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake pad wear indicator lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
FSS indicator  
FSS indicator (Service A), see page 87.  
indicator lamp comes on and goes out when  
the engine is running.  
FSS indicator (Service B), see page 87.  
If the indicator lamp lights up during braking, this  
indicates that the brake pads are worn down.  
The symbols appear in the main odometer display field  
prior to the next suggested service. Depending on  
operating conditions throughout the year, the next  
service is calculated and displayed in days or distance  
remaining. See page 87 for notes on the flexible service  
system (FSS).  
Have the brake system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
225  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle jack, wheel bolt  
Exterior lamps ................................260  
Headlamp assembly ...................261  
Taillamp assemblies ..................265  
Adjusting headlamp aim ...............268  
Remote control  
battery replacement .................270  
Synchronizing  
remote control ............................271  
Emergency operation of  
sliding/pop-up roof ...................272  
Emergency operation of  
Skyview Top ...............................273  
Manual release for  
fuel filler flap .............................274  
Replacing wiper blades .................275  
Roof rack ......................................... 276  
Practical hints  
wrench and screwdriver ......... 237  
Air pump .........................................239  
Wheels ............................................240  
Tire replacement .......................240  
Rotating wheels ......................... 241  
Spare wheel ....................................242  
Changing wheels ...........................245  
Tire inflation pressure ................. 250  
Battery ............................................. 251  
Jump starting ................................. 253  
Towing the vehicle ........................ 255  
Transmission selector lever,  
First aid kit .....................................228  
Fuses ................................................228  
Electrical outlet ..............................230  
Stowing things in the vehicle ......230  
Hood .................................................231  
Checking engine oil level .............233  
Automatic transmission  
fluid level ...................................234  
Engine oil consumption ................234  
Coolant level ...................................234  
Adding coolant ...........................235  
Windshield washer/headlamp  
manually unlocking ..................259  
Stranded vehicle ............................ 259  
cleaning system .........................236  
Windshield and  
headlamp washer fluid  
mixing ratio ................................237  
Contents - Practical hints  
227  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
First aid kit  
228  
First aid kit  
Fuses  
Before replacing a blown fuse, determine the cause of  
the short circuit.  
Spare fuses and a special fuse puller are supplied inside  
the fuse box cover. Observe amperage and color of fuse.  
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to  
repair or bridge a blown fuse.  
A fuse chart can be found inside the corresponding fuse  
box cover.  
All except model ML 55 AMG:  
The first aid kit is located behind the cover in the left  
rear cargo compartment trim panel.  
Turn both handles (1) left and open cover.  
Model ML 55 AMG:  
The first aid kit is stored inside the spare wheel cover  
located in the cargo compartment.  
Open buckles and remove spare wheel cover,  
see page 242.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuse box in engine compartment  
Auxiliary fuse box in front passenger footwell  
1
1 Fuse box in engine compartment  
2 Auxiliary fuse box in front passenger compartment  
To gain access to the fuse box, release clamps  
(arrows), lift the fuse box cover (1) up and remove it.  
To gain access to the fuse box, turn both locks (3)  
90° counterclockwise and remove cover in direction  
of arrow.  
To close the fuse box, engage back end of cover,  
close, and secure with clamps.  
To close the fuse box, engage back end of cover, slide  
the cover towards vehicle front and secure by  
turning both locks (3) clockwise to the stop.  
Fuses  
229  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Electrical outlet  
230  
Electrical outlet  
To open:  
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigar lighter  
type).  
Note:  
The electrical outlets can be used to accommodate  
accessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to  
maximum 180 W.  
Stowing things in the vehicle  
Warning!  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, always use partition net when  
transporting cargo. Always fasten items being  
carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-  
down rings and fastening materials appropriate for  
the weight and size of the load.  
Two electrical outlets can be found, one at the front  
passenger footwell, and the other in the rear  
compartment (always operational).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hood  
To open:  
Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill and open  
hood (do not pull up on handle).  
To unlock the hood, pull release lever (1) under the  
driver’s side of the instrument panel. At the same time a  
handle (2) will extend out of the radiator grill (it may be  
necessary to lift the hood up slightly).  
To close:  
Lower hood and let it drop into lock from a height of  
approximately 1 ft. (30 cm).  
Caution!  
To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is  
fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not  
push down on hood to attempt to fully close it.  
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open  
the hood only with wipers in the parked position.  
Engine compartment  
231  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Engine compartment  
Warning!  
232  
The engine is equipped with a transistorized  
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is  
dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils,  
spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the  
ignition system  
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of  
moving parts when the hood is open and the engine  
is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed  
before driving. When closing hood, use extreme  
caution not to catch hands or fingers.  
• with the engine running,  
• while starting the engine,  
The radiator fan may continue to run for  
approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the  
engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan  
blades.  
• if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned  
manually.  
If you see flames, steam or smoke coming from the  
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature  
gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do  
not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do  
not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If  
necessary, call a fire department.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking engine oil level  
Wipe oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil  
level. Fully insert dipstick in tube, and remove after  
three seconds to obtain accurate reading.  
Oil level must be between the  
lower (min) and upper (max) mark of  
the dipstick.  
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking,  
the level is approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).  
Do not overfill the engine. Excessive oil must be drained  
or siphoned. It could cause damage to engine and  
catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
1 Oil dipstick  
See page 224 for low engine oil level warning.  
2 Oil filler cap  
Note:  
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level  
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.  
See page 89 for engine oil level indicator.  
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after  
stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the  
oil pan.  
Engine compartment  
233  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Engine compartment  
Automatic transmission fluid level  
234  
Coolant level  
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic  
transmission fluid.  
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and  
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is  
omitted.  
If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions,  
have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center  
check the transmission fluid level.  
Engine oil consumption  
Engine oil consumption checks should only be made  
after the break-in period. During the break-in period,  
higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal.  
Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in  
increased consumption.  
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked  
on level ground and the engine stopped.  
Check coolant level only when coolant is cold.  
The coolant level should reach the COLD LEVEL mark in  
the reservoir.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding coolant  
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant  
reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F  
(90°C). Allow engine to cool down before  
removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains  
hot fluid and is under pressure.  
If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and  
MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added.  
After adding coolant, close cap until you hear it click a  
few times.  
• Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately  
1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened  
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will  
be blown out under pressure.  
The drain plugs for the cooling system are located on  
the left and right side of the engine block directly above  
the engine mounts and at the bottom of the radiator.  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixture, see page 297.  
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.  
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine  
parts.  
Warning!  
In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury:  
• Use extreme caution when opening the hood if  
there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking  
from the cooling system, or if the coolant  
temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is  
overheated.  
Engine compartment  
235  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Engine compartment  
236  
Windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system  
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield  
washer concentrate and water (or commercially  
available premixed windshield washer solvent/  
antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).  
Warning!  
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do  
not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine  
parts, because it may burn. You can be seriously  
burned.  
1 Windshield washer/headlamp cleaning/rear  
window wiper/washer system fluid reservoir  
Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system:  
Capacity approximately 5.3 US qt (5.0 l).  
Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system:  
Capacity approximately 8.0 US qt (7.6 l).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield and headlamp washer  
fluid mixing ratio  
Vehicle jack, wheel bolt wrench and screwdriver  
Warning!  
For temperatures above freezing:  
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  
vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either  
side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,  
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel  
change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is  
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away  
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always  
firmly set parking brake and block wheels before  
raising vehicle with jack.  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water  
1 part “S” to 100 parts water  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).  
For temperature below freezing:  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze  
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical  
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use  
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm  
end is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.  
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity  
jackstands before working under the vehicle.  
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).  
Windshield wiper  
237  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Spare wheel, vehicle jack  
238  
n !  
r
e
b
n t e  
r
g e  
e
b e  
h e  
h
t
u
h
b
i c  
g
e u  
r z  
n
S
g e n  
i c  
a
a h  
F
W
!
m
t e  
e
g
c k  
u r  
i t  
u n d  
b o  
e
m
a
r n  
n
s
a u f g  
d
W a  
!
n
r
b e  
t e  
n
g e  
e
e r  
h t  
u
b e  
b
i c  
h
n
h
n
e u g  
e
i c  
a g  
h r z  
S
a
W
F
t e  
!
e m  
g
c k  
b o  
u n d  
m r  
r n  
i t  
e
f g  
u
u
a
s
n
a
d
W a  
The vehicle jack, wheel bolt wrench and screwdriver are  
located in the rear cargo compartment behind the cover  
in the right side trim panel.  
Unscrew plastic nut (1) and lift out vehicle jack.  
See illustration for proper storage of jack and wheel bolt  
wrench.  
To get to tools, first remove trim panel cover by turning  
both handles to left, and then swing aside CD-player (if  
so equipped).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Air pump (ML 55 AMG)  
2
1
2 Vehicle jack  
1 Air pump  
3 Screwdriver  
2 Storage compartment  
4 Wheel bolt wrench  
The air pump is located behind the space-saver spare  
wheel.  
The screwdriver is placed inside the wheel bolt wrench  
handle.  
The air pump is secured with a strap.  
Spare wheel, vehicle jack  
239  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
240  
Wheels  
Tire replacement  
Replace rims or tires with the same designation,  
manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.  
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center  
for further information.  
Front and rear tires should be replaced in sets.  
Furthermore – in the event of tire replacement – the  
optional regular size spare wheel should be used on the  
rear axle. Rims and tires must be of the correct size and  
type. For dimensions, see technical data on page 288.  
Warning!  
We recommend that you break in new tires for  
approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.  
Do not mix different tire construction types (i.e.  
radial, bias, bias-belted) on your vehicle because  
handling may be adversely affected and may result  
in loss of control.  
It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be  
fastened to a tightening torque of 110 ft.lb. (150 Nm)  
whenever wheels are mounted.  
For rim and tire specifications, refer to technical data on  
page 288.  
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center  
for information on tested and recommended rims and  
tires for summer and winter operation. They can also  
offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.  
Warning!  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread  
is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained  
damage, replace them.  
When replacing rims, use only genuine  
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the  
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in  
the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotating wheels  
Notes:  
The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of  
tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.  
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time  
you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside.  
Rotating, however, should be carried out as  
The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread  
tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics  
and safety of the vehicle.  
recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the  
characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front  
wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes  
visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.  
Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and  
damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for  
damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be  
checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove  
burrs, if any.  
Important!  
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  
movement.  
Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after  
rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see  
page 250.  
Tires, Wheels  
241  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
242  
Spare wheel  
Space-saver tire (ML 55 AMG only)  
In the case of a flat tire or break-down, you may  
temporarily use the space-saver spare wheel, while  
observing the following restrictions:  
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).  
Drive to the nearest repair facility to have the flat  
tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.  
Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare  
wheel mounted.  
For rim and tire specifications, refer to “Technical data”  
on page 288.  
Caution!  
Removing spare wheel (space-saver tire):  
Exercise care when removing or installing spare wheel  
to prevent personal injury.  
1. Open buckle of clamp, then remove cover (1).  
2. Unscrew the three wheel bolts using wrench  
supplied with vehicle tools, and take out space-saver  
spare wheel, and remove the air pump from its  
compartment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Space-saver tire (except ML 55 AMG)  
To realize the total crumple zone in case of a rear end  
collision, the space-saver spare wheel must be stored in  
its holder with the tire deflated. Properly inflate the tire  
prior to mounting it on the axle. See page 249 for  
detailed instructions.  
When storing the space-saver spare wheel in its holder,  
tighten the three wheel bolts with a tightening torque of  
37 ft.lb. (50 Nm).  
P40.10-2368-26  
Removing spare wheel (space-saver tire):  
1. Hold left and right side of cover (1) at bottom and  
pull away from bumper (arrows).  
Tires, Wheels  
243  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
244  
2. Loosen screw (2) using wrench supplied with  
vehicle tools, see page 237. The screw (2) remains  
in the holder.  
3. Lift spare wheel carrier slightly and push lever (3)  
to the right using screwdriver supplied with vehicle  
tools, swing spare wheel carrier down and pull it out  
from under the bumper.  
4. Remove space-saver spare wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing wheels  
Warning!  
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  
vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either  
side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,  
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel  
change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is  
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away  
from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always  
firmly set parking brake and block wheels before  
raising vehicle with jack.  
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical  
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use  
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm  
end is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.  
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity  
jackstands before working under the vehicle.  
Position vehicle jack only at the jack take-up bracket  
when raising the vehicle.  
Tires, Wheels  
245  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
246  
Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance  
from the roadway.  
Important!  
The vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel rotates with  
the engine running. Do not leave the engine running  
while changing a wheel.  
1. Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning  
flasher.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P” and turn off  
engine, and remove key from the steering lock.  
P40.10-2370-26  
3. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking  
wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with  
vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When  
changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the  
downhill side blocking both wheels of the other  
axle. On a level road, place one chock in front of and  
one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to  
the wheel being changed.  
4. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the  
wheel bolts.  
5. Open jack enough to fit under vehicle.  
The jack take-up brackets are located directly  
behind the front wheel housings and in front of the  
rear wheel housings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Unscrew and remove all wheel bolts. Keep bolt  
threads protected from dirt and sand.  
9. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep  
hands from beneath the wheels.  
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.  
Install spare wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts  
and tighten them slightly.  
10. Lower vehicle to ground. Remove jack.  
Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with  
handle folded in.  
For proper storage of jack see page 237.  
6. Place jack on firm ground. Position the jack under  
the take-up bracket so that it is always vertical  
(plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the  
vehicle is parked on an incline.  
7. Open jack further until jack arm end seats firmly in  
the take-up bracket and its base sits squarely on the  
ground. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear  
of the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is  
raised.  
Tires, Wheels  
247  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
248  
Warning!  
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or  
rusted.  
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.  
1
4
2
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired  
immediately.  
3
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened  
mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off.  
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the  
correct mounting bolts.  
5
Notes:  
Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly,  
following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are  
tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 ft.lb. (150 Nm).  
The removed road wheel cannot be stored in the  
space-saver wheel carrier or inside the storage  
compartment in the rear cargo area (ML 55 AMG), but  
should be transported in the rear cargo compartment  
wrapped in a protective cover supplied with the vehicle.  
The protective cover is located in the rear cargo  
compartment behind the cover in the right side trim  
panel.  
Ensure proper tire pressure.  
Model ML 55 AMG:  
Store air pump in its proper location. Close and latch the  
spare wheel cover, see page 239.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inflating the space-saver tire (ML 55 AMG only)  
5. Plug air pump electrical plug (2) into electrical  
outlet in front passenger footwell or rear cargo  
compartment.  
6. Start the engine and switch on the air pump.  
Warning!  
When working on the vehicle with the engine  
running, always set the parking brake in addition  
to shifting the gear selector lever to position “P”.  
2
7. Operate air pump (approximately 8 minutes) until  
pressure gauge displays 61 psi (4.2 bar).  
3
1
8. Switch off air pump and turn off the engine.  
9. Unscrew filler hose from space-saver tire. Reinstall  
tire valve cap.  
1. Remove air pump from compartment behind the  
space-saver spare wheel.  
Warning!  
2. Open lid (arrow) and pull out filler hose (1) with  
pressure gauge and electrical plug (2). Observe  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
To prevent possible injury when unscrewing air  
pump filler hose from space-saver tire valve after  
inflating the tire, use a rag since the tire valve  
could be hot.  
3. Unscrew tire valve cap from space-saver tire valve.  
4. Screw filler hose (1) onto space-saver tire valve.  
Note:  
Excessive tire air pressure should be released using the  
vent screw.  
Tires, Wheels  
249  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
250  
Tire inflation pressure  
Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values  
offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation  
pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling  
characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly  
permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will  
become somewhat harder.  
A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation  
pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended  
tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.  
Important!  
Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle  
speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked  
and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in  
warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the  
pressure listed in the table and the respective operating  
conditions are taken into consideration.  
Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar)  
per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in  
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage –  
especially in the winter.  
Example:  
If garage temperature = approximately +68°F (+20°C)  
and ambient temperature = approximately +32°F (0°C)  
then the adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure  
+3 psi (+0.2 bar).  
An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a  
nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread  
separation, bulging etc.. Regular tire pressure checks  
(including the spare tire) at intervals of no more than  
14 days are therefore essential.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for  
damage.  
Battery  
Warning!  
The spare tire should be checked periodically for  
condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become  
worn over time even if never used, and thus should be  
inspected and replaced when necessary.  
Failure to follow these instructions can result in  
severe injury or death.  
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you  
might get injured.  
Warning!  
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow  
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected  
area with water and seek medical help if necessary.  
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can  
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they  
are more likely to become punctured or damaged  
by road debris, potholes etc.. Follow recommended  
inflation pressures.  
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is  
flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks  
away from battery, avoid improper connection of  
jumper cables, smoking etc..  
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified  
vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label  
on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the  
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a  
blowout.  
Important!  
Battery replacement information:  
The maintenance-free battery is located in the engine  
compartment.  
The service life of the battery is dependent on its  
condition of charge. The battery should always be kept  
sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length  
of time.  
Battery  
251  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Battery  
252  
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the  
battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if  
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than  
approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,  
mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for  
long periods of time.  
Note:  
After reconnecting the battery also set the clock in  
instrument cluster (see page 80), set date in trip  
computer (see page 83), resynchronize the sliding/pop-  
up roof (see page 272), the Skyview Top (see page 273)  
and the electronic stability program (ESP) (see  
page 206).  
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the  
battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s  
electrical circuit.  
Battery recycling  
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and  
connect last.  
Batteries contain material that can harm the  
environment with improper disposal.  
When removing and connecting the battery, always  
make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the  
key is in steering lock position 0. The battery must  
always be securely installed when the vehicle is in  
operation. During removal and installation always  
protect the disconnected battery positive (+) terminal  
with the cover attached to the battery.  
Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.  
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of  
disposal.  
Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old  
batteries for recycling.  
While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps  
must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the  
generator and other electronic components would be  
damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jump starting  
Warning!  
Important!  
A discharged battery can freeze at approximately +14°F  
(–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before  
jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a  
frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing  
personal injury.  
Failure to follow these directions will cause  
damage to the electronic components, and can lead  
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.  
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump  
starting, you might get injured.  
Jumper cable specifications:  
Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or  
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow  
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected  
area with water, and seek medical help if  
necessary.  
approximately 2 AWG  
Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).  
If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started  
with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another  
vehicle.  
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is  
flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or  
sparks away from battery, avoid improper  
connection of jumper cables, smoking etc..  
Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump  
starting with more powerful battery could damage the  
vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered  
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Read all instructions before proceeding.  
The battery is located in the engine compartment.  
Jump starting  
253  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Jump starting  
254  
Proceed as follows:  
Important!  
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that  
the jumper cables will reach, but never let the  
vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not  
have loose or missing insulation.  
5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery  
and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not  
on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move  
when the engine is started. Allow the discharged  
battery to charge for a few minutes. Start engine of  
the disabled vehicle in the usual manner.  
2. On both vehicles:  
Turn off engine and all lights and accessories,  
6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables  
by exactly reversing the above installation  
sequence, starting with the last connection made  
first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it  
does not touch any other metal while the other end  
is still attached.  
except hazard warning flashers or work lights.  
Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to  
position “P”.  
Important!  
3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the  
positive (+) under hood terminal of the discharged  
battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal  
of the charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps  
do not touch any other metal parts.  
Notes:  
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful  
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic  
converter.  
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the  
grounded negative (–) terminal of the charged  
battery and the final connection to the negative (–)  
terminal of the discharged battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing the vehicle  
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the  
ground, make certain that the key is in steering  
lock position 2.  
Important!  
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:  
With the automatic central locking activated and the  
engine running, the vehicle doors lock if the left front  
wheel is turning at vehicle speeds of approximately  
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.  
P88.20-2160-26  
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,  
deactivate the automatic central locking, see page 32.  
The front towing eye is located on the passenger side  
below the bumper.  
1 Towing eye, front  
Towing  
255  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Towing  
256  
The rear towing eye is located behind the right side  
cover in the bumper panel.  
2 Towing eye, rear  
Cover removal:  
Using a flat blade screwdriver pry out the cover.  
Cover installation:  
Engage cover at bottom and press in top securely.  
ML 320, ML 430  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning!  
In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury,  
use extreme caution when removing the cover,  
because the rear exhaust pipe is extremely hot.  
Cover removal:  
Grip cover at bottom and pull out.  
Cover installation:  
Engage cover and press in securely.  
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using  
flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other  
types of towing.  
ML 55 AMG  
The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground  
and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to  
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph  
(50 km/h). The key must be in steering lock position 2.  
The rear towing eye is located behind the right side  
cover (1) in the bumper panel.  
3 Cover  
4 Towing eye, rear  
Towing  
257  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Towing  
258  
To be certain to avoid additional damage to the vehicle  
powertrain, however you should do the following:  
Caution!  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the  
engine must be shut off (key in steering lock position 1).  
Otherwise, the 4-ETS+ may become engaged which may  
cause loss of towing control. Switch off the tow-away  
alarm (see page 36) as well as the ESP (see page 207).  
With damage to front axle, raise front axle. Remove  
flexible drive shaft between rear axle and transfer  
case  
With damage to rear axle, raise rear axle and tow  
vehicle with wheel lift or dolly placed under front  
wheels.  
Warning!  
With the engine not running, there is no power  
assistance for the braking and steering systems. In  
this case, it is important to keep in mind that a  
considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to  
brake and steer the vehicle.  
With damage to transfer case, remove flexible drive  
shafts to the drive axles.  
Note:  
Always install new self-locking nuts when reinstalling  
the flexible drive shaft.  
Note:  
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning  
flasher in use, turn key in steering lock to position 2  
and activate combination switch for left or right turn  
signal in usual manner. Now deactivate the hazard  
warning flasher, only the selected turn signal will  
operate. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard  
warning flasher must be activated again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking  
Stranded vehicle  
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the wheels are dug  
into sand or mud, should be done with the greatest of  
care, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded.  
Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diagonally, since it  
could result in damage to the chassis alignment.  
Never try to free a vehicle that is still coupled to a  
trailer.  
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer hitch receiver  
should be pulled backward in its own previously made  
tracks.  
In the case of power failure the transmission selector  
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.  
To do so, insert a pin (1), e.g. ball point pen, into the  
covered opening below the position “D” of the shift  
pattern. While pushing the pin down, move selector  
lever from position “P”.  
After removal of the pin from the opening, the cover will  
not close fully. Only after moving the selector lever to  
positions “D+” and “D–” does the cover return to its  
closed position.  
Towing  
259  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
260  
Exterior lamps  
Replacing bulbs  
To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off  
lamp prior to replacing a bulb.  
Headlamp adjustment  
When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with  
the specified watt rating.  
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important.  
Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and  
when a bulb has been replaced.  
When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass  
portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a  
clean cloth.  
For adjusting headlamp aim see page 268.  
Warning!  
Warning!  
Bulbs and bulb holders can be very hot. Allow the  
lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.  
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is  
dangerous to replace the bulb of repair the lamp  
and its components. We recommend that you have  
such work done by a qualified technician.  
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can  
explode if you:  
• touch or move it when hot,  
• drop the bulb,  
• scratch the bulb.  
Wear eye and hand protection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamp assembly (Halogen)  
1 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw  
2 Headlamp horizontal adjustment screw  
3 Headlamp cover with locking tab  
5 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb  
6 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb  
7 Level for headlamp vertical adjustment  
8 Scale for headlamp horizontal adjustment  
9 Auxiliary fog lamp (if so equipped)  
4 Bulb socket for turn signal, parking, standing, and  
side marker lamp  
Exterior lamps  
261  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
262  
Headlamp assembly (Xenon)  
1 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw  
5 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb  
6 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb  
7 Auxiliary fog lamp (if so equipped)  
2 Headlamp horizontal adjustment screw  
3 Headlamp cover with locking tab  
4 Bulb socket for turn signal, parking, standing, and  
side marker lamp  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulbs for high beam (only Halogen headlamps)  
H1 U (55 W)  
Xenon (optional)  
Bulb for low beam  
Bulbs for low beam  
H7 (55 W)  
Warning!  
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is  
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp  
and its components. We recommend that you have  
such work done by a qualified technician.  
Open hood.  
Push down tab at top end of cover (3) and remove. Pull  
off electrical connector (5 or 6). Unhook and move aside  
clamping ring. Remove bulb.  
Xenon (optional)  
Bulb for high beam  
Insert new bulb (seating properly in cutouts of bulb  
socket), mount clamping ring. Reinstall and push  
electrical connector on securely. Reinstall cover (3).  
Note:  
Vehicles with Xenon headlamps:  
We recommend that you have changed the bulb for the  
high beam by a qualified technician.  
Exterior lamps  
263  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
264  
Parking, standing, side marker and turn signal lamp  
1156 NA (32 / 4 cp bulb)  
Bulbs for auxiliary fog lamp (optional)  
H3 U (55 W)  
Open hood.  
Open hood.  
Twist bulb socket (4) counterclockwise and pull out.  
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and  
remove.  
Remove cover (9). Unhook clamping ring and remove  
bulb. Pull off electrical connector.  
Insert new bulb in socket (seating properly in cutouts of  
bulb socket), and mount clamping ring. Reinstall and  
push electrical connector on securely.  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Reinstall bulb socket.  
Reinstall cover (9).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Taillamp assemblies  
P82.10-2343-26  
P82.10-2342-26  
1 Stop lamp (1073 [32 cp bulb])  
2 Backup lamp (1073 [32 cp bulb])  
3 Turn signal lamp (P Y 21 W bulb)  
Open liftgate.  
Remove nuts (1).  
Remove taillamp.  
4 Tail, parking, standing and side marker lamp,  
driver’s side rear fog lamp (P 21/4 W bulb)  
Exterior lamps  
265  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
266  
Turn signal lamp, side (168 [3 cp bulb])  
Pull off electrical connector (2).  
Carefully slide lamp slightly towards rear (arrow), lift  
away its front end first, then remove lamp from panel.  
Squeeze tabs (3) together and remove bulb holder.  
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. Pull  
bulb out of socket.  
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and  
remove.  
Insert new bulb in socket. Reinstall bulb socket.  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Reinstall bulb holder.  
To reinstall lamp, set rear end of lamp into panel and let  
front end snap into place.  
Reinstall electrical connector (2).  
Reinstall taillamp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
License plate lamps (C 5 W [tubular] bulb)  
High mounted stop lamp (1073 [32 cp bulb])  
P82.10-2347-26  
P82.10-2346-26  
Remove both securing screws, remove lamp and take  
out bulb.  
To replace bulb, squeeze both sides (1, arrows) of cover,  
fold forward and remove.  
Press tab (2, arrow) on reflector and remove reflector.  
Press bulb down, turn counterclockwise and remove.  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Reinstall reflector.  
Position tabs of cover in slots (3, arrows) and reinstall  
cover until properly seated.  
Exterior lamps  
267  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
268  
Adjusting headlamp aim  
1. Park vehicle on level surface approximately 6 inches  
(152 mm) from a vertical test screen or wall. The  
centerline of the vehicle must be at a 90° angle to  
the test screen.  
2. (High beams on):  
Using a carpenter’s level, align and mark a vertical  
centerline (1) on the test screen for each headlamp  
lens at a distance of 25 3/4 inches (654 mm) from  
the vertical centerline. As a check, the distance  
between centerlines should be 51 1/2 inches  
H
low beam  
(1308 mm). The star emblem on the hood may be  
used to determine the vehicle centerline. If the  
distance does not check, have the system verified at  
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
V
3. Move vehicle on the level surface 25 feet (7.6 m)  
straight back from the wall.  
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important.  
To check and readjust a headlamp, follow steps 1  
through 7.  
4. Open hood.  
Please note:  
High beam adjustments simultaneously aim the low  
beam.  
Vehicle should have a normal trunk load.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. (High beams on):  
7. For proper aim, the indicator (8 on page 261) should  
align with the “0” mark after horizontal adjustment.  
Simultaneously turn adjusting screws (1 and 2 on  
page 261 or 262) counterclockwise to adjust  
headlamp downward, clockwise upward) equally  
until bubble in the level (7 on page 261) is centered  
on the “0” mark.  
Graduations: 0.33° pitch.  
Note:  
If it is not possible to obtain a proper headlamp  
adjustment, have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Graduations:  
screw 1: 0.50° pitch,  
screw 2: 0.67° pitch.  
6. Horizontal headlamp aim (High beams on):  
Turn adjusting screw (2) (left headlamp:  
counterclockwise to adjust to the left, clockwise to  
the right [right headlamp in opposite direction])  
until the headlamp (high beam pattern) is centered  
about the vertical centerline (1) as shown.  
The left and right headlamps must be adjusted  
individually.  
Exterior lamps  
269  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Remote control  
270  
Remote control battery replacement  
Changing batteries  
Notes:  
Unfold master key from holder by pressing key release  
button. Pull off battery cover (1).  
To assure proper operation of the remote control, push  
each button. Repeat battery installation, if remote  
control does not function correctly.  
Change batteries, inserting new ones with (+) side  
facing up.  
If the remote control does not function correctly after  
repeating battery installation, the system may have to be  
resynchronized, see below.  
Press battery cover onto housing until locked in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synchronizing remote control  
Important!  
If the remote control does not function correctly and the  
batteries are in order, the system may have to be  
resynchronized.  
Batteries contain materials that can harm the  
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of  
batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For  
disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation  
on battery package.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 2, then to  
position 0 and remove.  
Replacement Battery:  
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.  
Within 10 seconds, push and hold button while  
pushing button Œ five times.  
Release the button, and press , Œ or Š once.  
Check all functions. The remote control should once  
again be operational.  
Note:  
If it is not possible to resynchronize the remote control,  
have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-  
Benz Light Truck Center.  
Remote control  
271  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof  
Emergency operation of sliding/pop-up roof  
272  
Note:  
Push crank upward while turning it, to disengage the  
electric motor.  
To slide the roof closed or to raise the roof at the rear:  
turn crank clockwise.  
To slide the roof open or to lower the roof at the rear:  
turn crank counterclockwise.  
RES
Important!  
After manually operating the sliding/pop-up roof, a  
timing synchronization is needed for future electrical  
operation of the roof. To do so, remove fuse for sliding/  
pop-up roof operation, located in fuse box, for one  
second and reinstall. Now push and hold switch until  
the sliding/pop-up roof is fully raised. Continue to hold  
switch for another second.  
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened or closed  
manually should an electrical malfunction occur.  
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind the  
cover between the front interior lamps.  
1. Open cover by using a flat blade screw driver at top  
edge.  
2. Obtain crank (supplied with vehicle) and insert in  
hexagon drive hole, located at rear end of the open  
cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency operation of Skyview Top  
The Skyview Top can be opened or closed manually  
should an electrical malfunction occur.  
Insert crank (3) into right side motor.  
Note:  
The drive for the Skyview Top is located behind a  
cover (1) in the rear compartment headliner.  
Push crank upward while turning it, to disengage the  
electric motor.  
Remove cover to gain access to the drive motors.  
Obtain crank (3) (located at left side motor).  
To close the Skyview Top: turn crank clockwise.  
Remove plug (2) from holder, located next to the motors,  
and insert into left side drive motor to declutch the  
motor.  
To open the Skyview Top: turn crank counterclockwise.  
Emergency operation of Skyview Top  
273  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Manual release for fuel filler flap  
Important!  
274  
Manual release for fuel filler flap  
After manually operating the Skyview Top, a timing  
synchronization is needed for future electrical operation  
of the Skyview Top. To do so, turn key in steering lock to  
position 2. Now push and hold switch until the Skyview  
Top is fully closed. Continue to hold switch for  
additional 15 seconds.  
The manual release is located behind the cover in the  
left rear compartment trim panel.  
In case the central locking system does not release the  
fuel filler flap, pull up on the lock rod (arrow).  
ML 55 AMG:  
First remove the space-saver tire from its holder, see  
page 242.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing wiper blades  
Replacing windshield/rear window wiper blade  
For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock before  
replacing the wiper blade, otherwise the motor can  
suddenly turn on and cause injury.  
3
Notes:  
1
4
Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward.  
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield  
glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be  
scratched or broken.  
2
Make certain that the wiper blade is properly installed.  
An improperly installed wiper blade may cause  
windshield damage.  
P82.30-0338-26  
The wiper with air spoiler should be mounted on the  
driver’s side.  
Removal:  
Fold wiper arm (1) forward (windshield)/rearward (rear  
window) and turn wiper blade (2) at a right angle to the  
arm. Push safety tab (3) of attachment link (4) and slide  
the wiper blade from the end of the wiper arm. Remove  
the wiper blade.  
Installation:  
Slide wiper blade into end of wiper arm until it locks in  
place.  
Replacing wiper blades  
275  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Roof rack  
276  
Roof rack  
Use only those roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.  
Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions. They  
mount to the roof rails and do not require additional  
supports (e.g. suction cups or legs). Such supports may  
lead to marring of the paint or denting the roof. For  
further information inquire at your Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center.  
Take into consideration that when the roof rack is  
loaded, the handling characteristics are different from  
those when operating the vehicles without the roof rack  
loaded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window cleaning ....................... 281  
Wiper blades .............................. 281  
Light alloy wheels ..................... 281  
Instrument cluster ..................... 281  
Steering wheel and  
gear selector lever ..................... 281  
Cup holder ..................................282  
Seat belts .....................................282  
Headliner ....................................282  
Upholstery ..................................282  
Hard plastic trim items .............282  
Plastic and rubber parts ...........282  
Vehicle care  
Cleaning and care  
of the vehicle .............................278  
Power washer ..............................279  
Tar stains .....................................279  
Paintwork, painted body  
components .................................279  
Engine cleaning ..........................280  
Vehicle washing .........................280  
Ornamental moldings ................280  
Headlamps, taillamps,  
turn signal lenses ......................280  
Contents - Vehicle care  
277  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
278  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
More frequent washings are necessary to deal with  
unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in  
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during  
winter operation.  
Warning!  
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some  
are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow  
the instructions on the particular container.  
Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when  
cleaning the inside.  
You should check your vehicle from time to time for  
stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be  
repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of  
corrosion.  
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed  
for cleaning your vehicle.  
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle.  
A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the  
underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged  
areas need to be reundercoated.  
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying  
external influences which, if gone unchecked, can  
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and  
cause lasting damage.  
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-  
base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for  
the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is  
neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz  
because of the possibility of incompatibility between  
materials used in the production process and others  
applied later.  
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying  
climatic conditions, but also by air polution, road salt,  
tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel,  
coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins  
etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint  
damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates  
the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse  
influences.  
We have selected car-care products and compiled  
recommendations which are specially matched to our  
vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.  
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care  
products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due  
to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed  
or repaired with the car-care products recommended  
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Tar stains  
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become  
more difficult to remove. A tar remover is  
recommended.  
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of  
your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as  
well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care  
products.  
Paintwork, painted body components  
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied  
when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”,  
normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and  
washing detergent used.  
Additional information can be found in the booklet titled  
Vehicle Care Guide”.  
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be  
applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding  
(i.e. loss of gloss).  
Power washer  
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle  
always observe manufacturers’ operating instructions.  
Do not apply any of these products or wax if your  
vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.  
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and  
provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips  
from stones, vehicle doors etc.).  
Caution!  
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The  
intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.  
Always replace a damaged tire.  
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface.  
Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical  
connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
279  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Engine cleaning  
280  
Due to the width of the vehicle, prior to running the  
vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold back the  
outside mirrors to prevent them from getting damaged.  
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to  
protect electrical components and connectors from the  
intrusion of water and cleaning agents.  
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt  
as soon as possible.  
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax  
should be applied to the engine compartment after  
every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control  
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The  
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any  
wax.  
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the  
inner sides of the wheels.  
Ornamental moldings  
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-  
plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.  
Vehicle washing  
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct  
sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as  
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.  
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses  
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz  
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.  
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of  
water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the  
ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the  
sponge and chamois frequently.  
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use  
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses.  
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or  
sponge.  
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a  
chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the  
finish.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window cleaning  
Light alloy wheels  
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An  
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.  
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for  
regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.  
If possible, clean wheels once a week with  
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft  
bristle brush and a strong spray of water.  
Note:  
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key  
from steering lock before cleaning the windshield,  
otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and  
cause injury.  
Follow instructions on container.  
Note:  
Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could  
lead to corrosion or may damage the clear coat.  
Wiper blades  
Clean the wiper blade rubbers with a clean cloth and  
detergent solution.  
Instrument cluster  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Note:  
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key  
from steering lock before cleaning the wiper blades,  
otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and  
cause injury.  
Steering wheel and gear selector lever  
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean  
with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
281  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Cup holder  
282  
Upholstery  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that  
have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet  
etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently  
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper  
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be  
prevented.  
Seat belts  
Leather Upholstery  
The webbing must not be treated with chemical  
cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and  
soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above  
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.  
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry  
thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved  
Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning  
perforated leather as its underside should not become  
wet.  
Warning!  
Cloth Upholstery  
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo  
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.  
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely  
weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to  
provide adequate protection.  
Hard plastic trim items  
Headliner  
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft  
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.  
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo  
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.  
Plastic and rubber parts  
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine oils ...................................... 294  
Engine oil additives ......................294  
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........294  
Brake fluid ...................................... 294  
Premium unleaded gasoline ........295  
Fuel requirements ........................ 295  
Gasoline additives .........................296  
Coolants ..........................................296  
Consumer information ................. 298  
Technical data  
Spare parts service ........................284  
Warranty coverage .........................284  
Identification labels .......................285  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............286  
Technical data ................................287  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants  
etc. – capacities .........................292  
Contents - Technical data  
283  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
284  
Spare parts service  
Warranty coverage  
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Centers  
maintain a stock of original spare parts required for  
maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically  
located parts distribution centers provide quick and  
reliable parts service.  
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the  
“warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty  
Information booklet and your authorized Mercedes-  
Benz Light Truck Center will exchange or repair any  
defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in  
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:  
More than 300 000 different spare parts, for  
Mercedes-Benz models, are available.  
1. New vehicle limited warranty  
2. Emission system warranty  
3. Emission performance warranty  
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to  
stringent quality inspections. Each part has been  
specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and  
adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.  
4. California, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission  
control systems warranty  
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should  
be installed.  
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties,  
copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center.  
Important!  
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not  
authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle  
which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty, or compromise its durability or  
safety.  
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet  
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information  
booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center arrange for a replacement. It will be  
mailed to you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Identification labels  
1 Certification label and Paintwork Number  
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
3 Engine number  
4 Information label, California version  
5 Emission control label  
Vacuum line routing for emission control system  
Note:  
When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle  
identification and engine numbers.  
Technical data  
285  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
286  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive  
1 Automatic belt tensioner  
2 Crankshaft  
3 Air conditioner compressor  
4 Coolant pump  
5 Generator (alternator)  
6 Idler pulley  
7 Power steering pump  
For dimensions of the poly-V-belt, see technical data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical data  
Model  
ML 320 (163 154)1  
ML 430 (163 172)1  
ML 55 AMG (163 174)1  
Engine  
112  
113  
113  
Mode of operation  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
No. of cylinders  
Bore  
6
8
8
3.54 in (89.90 mm)  
3.31 in (84.00 mm)  
195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)  
10:1  
3.54 in (89.90 mm)  
3.31 in (84.00 mm)  
260.6 cu.in. (4266 cm3)  
10:1  
3.82 in (97.00 mm)  
3.62 in (92.00 mm)  
332.0 cu.in. (5439 cm3)  
10.5:1  
Stroke  
Total piston displacement  
Compression ratio  
Output acc. to SAE J 1349  
215 hp/5600 rpm  
268 hp/5750 rpm  
342 hp/5500 rpm  
(160 kW/5600 rpm)  
(200 kW/5750 rpm)  
(255 kW/5500 rpm)  
Maximum torque acc. to  
SAE J 1349  
233 ft.lb/3000 rpm  
(315 Nm/3000 rpm)  
288 ft.lb/3000 rpm  
(390 Nm/3000 rpm)  
376 ft.lb/2800 rpm  
(510 Nm /2800 rpm)  
Maximum engine speed  
Firing order  
6000 rpm  
1-4-3-6-2-5  
2390 mm  
6000 rpm  
6000 rpm  
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8  
2390 mm  
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8  
2390 mm  
Poly-V-belt  
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all  
special bodies and special equipment.  
Technical data  
287  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
ML 320  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
288  
Rims – Tires  
Model  
ML 430  
ML 55 AMG  
Rims (light alloy)  
Wheel offset  
8 J x 16 H 2 ET62  
2.4 in (62 mm)  
81/2 J x17 H2 ET52  
2.0 in (52 mm)  
9 J x 18 H2 ET 52  
2.0 in (52 mm)  
All season tires:  
Radial-ply tires  
255/65 R 16 109H  
275/55 R 17 109H  
285/50 R 18 109W1  
Spare wheel  
Rim (standard equipment)  
Steel  
Wheel offset  
4 J x 18 H 2 ET0  
0 in (0 mm)  
4 J x 18 H 2 ET0  
0 in (0 mm)  
4 J x 18 H 2 ET0  
0 in (0 mm)  
Space-saver tire  
T155/90 D18 113M1  
T155/90 D18 113M1  
T155/90 D18 113M1  
1
Must not be used with snow chains.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rims – Winter tires  
Model  
ML 55 AMG  
Rims (light alloy)  
Wheel offset  
81/2 J x 17 H2 ET 52  
2.0 in (52 mm)  
All season tires:  
Radial-ply tires  
275/55 R 17 109H  
Rims – Tires (optional)  
Model  
ML 320  
ML 430  
Rims (light alloy)  
Wheel offset  
81/2 J x17 H2 ET52  
2.0 in (52 mm)  
81/2 J x17 H2 ET47  
1.85 in (47 mm)  
Rims (light alloy)  
Wheel offset  
81/2 J x17 H2 ET47  
1.85 in (47 mm)  
All season tires:  
Radial-ply tires  
275/55 R 17 109H  
275/55 R 17 109H  
Technical data  
289  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
290  
Electrical system  
Model  
ML 320  
ML 430  
ML 55 AMG  
Generator (alternator)  
Starter motor  
Battery  
14 V/115 A  
12V /1.7 kW  
12V/100 Ah  
14 V/150 A  
12V /1.7 kW  
12V/100 Ah  
14 V/150 A  
12V / 1.7 kW  
12V/100 Ah  
Spark plugs  
Bosch F 8 DPER  
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
Bosch F 8 DPER  
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
Bosch F 8 DPER  
Electrode gap  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
Tightening torque  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
Weights  
(see certification tag)  
Roof load max.  
220 lbs (100 kg)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main dimensions  
Model  
ML 320  
ML 430  
ML 55 AMG  
Overall vehicle length  
Overall vehicle width  
Overall height  
Wheel base  
180.6 in (4587 mm)  
86.2 in (2190 mm)  
71.6 in (1820 mm)  
111.0 in (2820 mm)  
60.4 in (1535 mm)  
60.4 in (1535 mm)  
180.6 in (4587 mm)  
86.2 in (2190 mm)  
71.6 in (1820 mm)  
111.0 in (2820 mm)  
61.2 in (1555 mm)  
61.2 in (1555 mm)  
182.5 in (4635 mm)  
86.2 in (2190 mm)  
71.0 in (1804 mm)  
111.0 in (2820 mm)  
61.2 in (1555 mm)  
61.2 in (1555 mm)  
Track, front  
Track, rear  
Technical data  
291  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. – capacities  
292  
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended  
by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck  
Center.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Model  
Capacity  
Engine with oil filter  
(recommended engine oils)  
ML 320/ML 430  
ML 55 AMG  
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)  
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)  
Automatic transmission  
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)  
(automatic transmission fluid)  
Transfer case  
1.6 US qt (1.5 l)  
(Dexron 3 or Dexron 2E)  
Rear axle  
1.3 US qt (1.25 l)  
(Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90)  
Front axle  
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)  
(Hypoid gear oil SAE 90)  
Power steering  
(MB Power steering fluid)  
approx. 0.65 US qt (0.6 l)  
approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each  
Front wheel hubs  
(high temperature roller bearing grease)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Model  
Capacity  
Brake system  
approx. 0.9 US qt (0.8 l)  
(MB Brake fluid [DOT 4+])  
Windshield/headlamp washer system  
Vehicles without  
headlamp cleaning  
system  
approx. 5.5 US qt (5.0 l)  
(MB Windshield washer concentrate “S” 1)  
Vehicles with headlamp approx. 8.0 US qt (7.6 l)  
cleaning system  
Cooling system  
approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l)  
(MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze)  
Fuel tank  
including a reserve of  
(Premium unleaded gasoline:  
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON))  
ML 320 / ML 430  
ML 55 AMG  
approx. 19.2 US gal (73.0 l)  
approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)  
approx. 24.5 US gal (93.0 l)  
approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l)  
Air conditioner system  
(R-134a refrigerant and special  
PAC lubricant (Never R-12))  
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios, see  
page 237.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Instruments  
293  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Engine oils  
294  
Air conditioner refrigerant  
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil  
is used in the air conditioner system.  
Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in  
our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils  
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on  
recommended brands is available at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.  
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil,  
otherwise damage to the system will occur.  
Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for  
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in  
engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
Brake fluid  
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake  
fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of  
moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard  
operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to  
the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing  
the system’s efficiency.  
Engine oil additives  
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be  
harmful to the engine operation.  
The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two  
years, preferably in the spring.  
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil  
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited  
Warranty.  
It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by  
Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center will provide you with additional  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Premium unleaded gasoline  
Caution!  
Fuel requirements  
Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM  
standard D 439:  
To maintain the engine’s durability and performance,  
premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium  
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used,  
follow these precautions:  
The octane number (posted at the pump) must be  
91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane  
number and the Motor (M) octane number: [(R+M)/2].  
This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.  
have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded  
regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon  
as possible,  
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as  
Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the  
ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not  
exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%.  
avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,  
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3%  
plus additional cosolvents.  
do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the  
vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two  
persons and no luggage,  
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed.  
Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded  
gasoline, can be used.  
do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal  
position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in  
mountainous terrain.  
These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements  
such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor  
pressure etc..  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
295  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Gasoline additives  
296  
Coolants  
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon  
build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz  
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and  
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:  
recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing  
additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.  
corrosion protection,  
freeze protection,  
After an extended period of using fuels without such  
additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the  
intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to  
engine performance problems such as:  
boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point).  
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a  
coolant providing freeze protection to approximately  
-35°F (-37°C) and corrosion protection.  
warm-up hesitation,  
unstable idle,  
knocking/pinging,  
misfire,  
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the  
boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling  
system is reached at approx. 266°F (130°C).  
The coolant solution must be used year round to provide  
the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the  
boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every  
3 years.  
power loss.  
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel.  
They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be  
harmful to the engine operation.  
To provide the important corrosion protection, the  
solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze  
(equals a freeze protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If  
you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/  
antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C])-,  
Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel  
quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the engine temperature will increase due to the lower  
heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not  
use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.  
Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in  
the hot southern regions), you should have the  
anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The  
coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring  
your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center for service.  
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/  
antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper  
level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).  
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum  
requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal  
drinking water. If your are not sure about the water  
quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light  
Truck Center.  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity  
Approx. freeze protection  
– 35°F  
– 49°F  
(– 45°C)  
(– 37°C)  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze  
6.4 US qt  
(6.0 l)  
7.0 US qt  
(6.6 l)  
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The  
use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines  
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used  
in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the  
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/  
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly  
shortened service life.)  
Therefore the following product is strongly  
recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
297  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Consumer information  
Consumer information  
298  
Treadwear  
This has been prepared as required of all manufactures  
of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal  
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic  
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half  
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and  
may depart significantly from the norm due to  
Uniform tire quality grading  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the  
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum  
section width. For example:  
variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction  
Tread wear 200 Traction AA  
Temperature A  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop  
on wet pavement as measured under controlled  
conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to federal  
safety requirements in addition to these grades.  
Warning!  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight ahead braking traction tests, and does not  
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or  
peak traction characteristics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Temperature  
Warning!  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of  
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the  
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,  
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire  
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of  
The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not  
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or  
excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause excessive heat build up  
and possible tire failure.  
performance which all passenger vehicle tires must  
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law.  
Consumer information  
299  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
300  
Ashtray  
Index  
Center console, front ................................................ 118  
Rear passenger compartment ................................. 118  
Automatic central locking ..............................................32  
Automatic transmission ................................................165  
Emergency Operation ...............................................172  
Fluid level .................................................................. 234  
Selector lever position ..............................................168  
A
ABS (Antilock brake system) .......................................201  
LOW RANGE – ABS ..................................................202  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................222  
Adjustable steering wheel ..............................................70  
Indicator lamp ...........................................................222  
Adjusting headlamp aim ...............................................268  
Air conditioner refrigerant ...........................................294  
Air pump .........................................................................239  
Air recirculation ............................................................102  
Airbag deactivation system ............................................53  
Airbag OFF indicator lamp ...........................................222  
Airbags ..............................................................................56  
Alarm system ............................................................. 35, 36  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze ....................181, 235, 293, 297  
Antiglare night position ................................................. 71  
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................................201  
LOW RANGE – ABS ..................................................202  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................222  
Antitheft alarm system ...................................................35  
Aquaplaning ...................................................................178  
Transmission selector lever,  
manually unlocking 259  
B
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system .....................53  
Self-test .........................................................................53  
BAS (Brake assist system) ............................................199  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Battery .............................................................................251  
Battery recycling ...................................................... 252  
Charge indicator lamp ............................................. 223  
Battery, remote control ................................................. 270  
Block heater ....................................................................182  
Blocking of rear door windows ....................................105  
Brake assist system (BAS) ............................................199  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake fluid ............................................................. 175, 294  
Brake warning lamp ................................................. 219  
Capacity ......................................................................293  
Brake pad wear indicator .............................................225  
Brake warning lamp ...................................................... 219  
Brake fluid low .......................................................... 219  
Brakes ....................................................173, 175, 293, 294  
Central locking system ....................................................26  
Automatic central locking .........................................32  
Locking and unlocking ...............................................27  
Mechanical keys ..........................................................29  
Panic button .................................................................28  
Remote control ............................................................26  
Unlocking the liftgate .................................................28  
Vehicle keys .................................................................24  
Changing wheels ........................................................... 245  
Inflating the space-saver tire ................................. 249  
Charge indicator lamp .................................................. 223  
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp ............ 218  
Check regularly and before a long trip .......................215  
Checking engine oil level  
Via engine oil level indicator ....................................89  
Via oil dipstick .......................................................... 233  
Child restraint ..............................................38, 46, 53, 65  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ................................ 278  
Climate control .................................................................98  
Air recirculation ........................................................102  
Basic setting ...............................................................100  
Defogging windows ...................................................101  
Defrosting windshield ..............................................101  
Dust filter ...................................................................102  
Rear window defroster .............................................103  
Special settings ......................................................... 101  
C
Capacities  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ...............................292  
Cargo area ....................................................................... 131  
Hooks ..........................................................................133  
Loading instructions ................................................136  
Cargo area cover blind ..................................................137  
Cargo compartment lamp ..............................................111  
Cargo floor plates  
Removable ..................................................................129  
Storage ........................................................................ 130  
Cargo tie-down rings ..................................................... 132  
Catalytic converter ........................................................ 160  
Cellular telephone .........................................................139  
Center console ..................................................................20  
Central locking switch ....................................................32  
Index  
301  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
302  
Clock, adjusting ...............................................................80  
Compartment under front passenger seat ..................116  
Consumer information ..................................................298  
Control and operation of radio transmitters .............146  
Coolant level  
Doors ..................................................................................30  
Drinking and driving ..................................................... 174  
Drive sensibly - save fuel .............................................. 174  
Driving instructions ...................................................... 174  
Driving off ....................................................................... 176  
Adding ........................................................................235  
Checking ....................................................................234  
Low engine coolant level warning ..........................224  
Coolant temperature gauge ............................................ 81  
Coolants ...........................................................................296  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity .........................296  
Low engine coolant level warning ..........................224  
Cover blind, cargo area ................................................. 137  
Cruise control ................................................................. 196  
Cup holder  
E
EBP (Electronic brake proportioning) ........................ 204  
Electrical outlet ............................................................. 230  
Electronic brake proportioning (EBP) ........................ 204  
Electronic stability program (ESP) ............................. 205  
Control switch .......................................................... 207  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Synchronizing .......................................................... 206  
Warning lamp ............................................................221  
Electronic traction system (4-ETS+) ........................... 203  
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS ............................................... 204  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Emergency call  
Instrument panel .......................................................116  
Rear center console ...................................................117  
D
Daytime running lamps .................................................. 91  
Deep water  
Driving instructions ................................................. 181  
Defroster, rear window ..................................................103  
Display illumination ........................................................80  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................148  
Emergency operation of Skyview Top ....................... 273  
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) .........................55  
Emergency unlocking in case of accident ...................33  
Emission control ............................................................ 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emission control label ..................................................285  
Engine compartment .....................................................231  
Engine malfunction  
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp ....... 218  
Engine oil additives .......................................................294  
Engine oil consumption ................................................234  
Engine oil level  
Checking .............................................................89, 233  
Warning ......................................................................224  
Engine oil level indicator ................................................89  
Engine oils ......................................................................294  
Capacities ...................................................................292  
Low engine oil level warning ..................................224  
Engine overheating ......................................................... 81  
Engine speed limit  
Overrevving .................................................................82  
Enlarged cargo area ....................................................... 131  
Entrance lamps ...............................................................112  
ESP  
ETR (Emergency tensioning retractor) .........................55  
ETS (4-ETS+) .................................................................. 203  
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS+ ............................................ 204  
Exterior lamp switch .......................................................90  
Exterior lamps ............................................................... 260  
Adjusting headlamp aim ......................................... 268  
Auxiliary fog lamp .............................................92, 264  
Fog lamps .....................................................................93  
Headlamp assembly ......................................... 261, 262  
Headlamps .................................90, 261, 262, 268, 280  
High mounted stop lamp ......................................... 267  
License plate lamps ................................................. 267  
Low and high beam ............................................90, 263  
Parking lamp ......................................................90, 264  
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 260  
Side marker lamp ..................................................... 264  
Standing lamp .....................................................90, 264  
Taillamp assemblies ................................................ 265  
Turn signal lamp ................................................90, 264  
Turn signal lamp, side ............................................. 266  
Exterior rear view mirrors ..............................................73  
Electrically folding ......................................................75  
LOW RANGE — ESP ..................................................208  
ESP (Electronic stability program) ..............................205  
Control switch ...........................................................207  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Synchronizing ...........................................................206  
Warning lamp ............................................................221  
Index  
303  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
304  
F
G
First aid kit .....................................................................228  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........................................87  
FSS indicator lamp ............................................79, 225  
Floor plates  
Removable ..................................................................129  
Fog lamp switch ........................................................ 92, 93  
Four ETS  
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS+ .............................................204  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Four wheel electronic traction system (4-ETS+) .......203  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................221  
Fuel  
Gasoline additives ....................................................296  
Premium unleaded gasoline ................. 213, 293, 295  
Fuel filler flap  
Garage door opener .......................................................140  
Gasoline  
Additives .................................................................... 296  
Fuel requirements ................................................... 295  
Premium unleaded .................................................. 295  
General notes on the central locking system ..............26  
Glass breakage sensor ....................................................36  
Glove box ......................................................................... 115  
H
Hazard warning flasher switch .....................................94  
Head restraints  
Adjusting ......................................................................43  
Front ..............................................................................43  
Front, removal .............................................................43  
Rear .............................................................................124  
Removal ...............................................................43, 125  
Headlamp aim, adjusting ............................................. 268  
Headlamp assembly  
Manual release ..........................................................274  
Fuel requirements .........................................................295  
Fuel reserve warning ....................................................220  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - Capacities ..............292  
Fuses, electrical .............................................................228  
Halogen .......................................................................261  
Xenon ......................................................................... 262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamp cleaning system ............................................94  
Headlights .........................................................................90  
Heated seats .....................................................................44  
Hood .................................................................................231  
Hooks ...............................................................................133  
Instruments and controls ............................................... 18  
Interior  
General notes ............................................................. 114  
Interior lighting .............................................................. 110  
J
I
Jump starting ................................................................. 253  
Identification labels .......................................................285  
Illuminated vanity mirrors ............................................113  
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ...................78  
Infant and child restraint system  
Installation ...................................................................67  
Infant and child restraint systems ................................65  
Inflating the space-saver tire .......................................249  
Information call  
K
Keys, vehicle .....................................................................24  
L
Lamps, exterior .............................................................. 260  
Adjusting headlamp aim ......................................... 268  
Auxiliary fog lamp .............................................92, 264  
Fog lamps .....................................................................93  
Headlamp assembly ......................................... 261, 262  
Headlamps .................................90, 261, 262, 268, 280  
High mounted stop lamp ......................................... 267  
License plate lamps ................................................. 267  
Low and high beam ............................................90, 263  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................148  
Instrument cluster ........................................................... 76  
Activating display .......................................................80  
Display illumination ...................................................80  
Indicator lamps ...........................................................78  
Malfunction and indicator lamps ........................... 218  
Instrument lamps ............................................................80  
Index  
305  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
306  
Parking lamp ......................................................90, 264  
Replacing bulbs .........................................................260  
Side marker lamp ......................................................264  
Standing lamp ....................................................90, 264  
Taillamp assemblies .................................................265  
Turn signal lamp ................................................90, 264  
Turn signal lamp, side .............................................266  
Layout of poly-V-belt ......................................................286  
Liftgate ...............................................................................34  
Unlocking .....................................................................28  
Lighter ..............................................................................119  
Limp home mode (Automatic transmission) .............172  
Loading instructions ..................................................... 136  
Lockable storage compartment .....................................116  
Locking and unlocking the vehicle ...............................27  
Low engine coolant level warning ..............................224  
Low engine oil level warning .......................................224  
LOW RANGE  
M
Maintenance ...................................................................147  
Malfunction and indicator lamps in the instrument  
cluster ......................................................................... 218  
Manual locking/unlocking the doors ...........................29  
Manual operation of Skyview Top .............................. 273  
Manual operation of sliding/pop-up roof .................. 272  
Manual seat, front ............................................................39  
MCS, radio and telephone ............................................146  
Mechanical keys ...............................................................29  
Memory .............................................................................42  
Recalling .......................................................................42  
Storing ...........................................................................42  
Mirror, exterior, adjusting ..............................................73  
Mirror, exterior, rear view ..............................................73  
Mirror, inside, rear view ................................................. 71  
Mirrors, vanity ................................................................ 113  
Indicator lamp ...........................................................221  
LOW RANGE mode ........................................................209  
LOW RANGE – 4-ETS+ .............................................204  
LOW RANGE – ABS ..................................................202  
LOW RANGE – ESP ...................................................208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power windows ...............................................................104  
Blocking of rear door windows ...............................105  
Express opening of front door windows ................105  
Problems with your vehicle ............................................ 15  
Product information ..........................................................7  
O
Obtaining replacement keys ..........................................25  
Odometer/Trip odometer ................................................80  
Off-Road driving .............................................................183  
On-board diagnostic system ......................................... 218  
Operator’s manual ............................................................. 8  
Outside temperature indicator ......................................82  
Overhead control panel ................................................... 21  
R
Radio transmitters .........................................................146  
Rain sensor  
See windshield wiper/washer switch ......................95  
Rear quarter windows ...................................................106  
Rear seat bench ..............................................................120  
Easy entry/exit feature ............................................123  
Head restraints ..........................................................124  
Rear seat head restraints ..............................................124  
Adjusting ....................................................................125  
Removal ......................................................................125  
Rear view mirrors  
Exterior .........................................................................73  
Inside ............................................................................ 71  
Rear window defroster ..................................................103  
Rear window wiper/washer ...........................................96  
P
Panic button ......................................................................28  
Parking .............................................................................176  
Parking brake ....................... 118, 173, 175, 176, 219, 245  
Partition net .................................................................... 133  
Poly-V-belt  
Layout .........................................................................286  
Power assistance ............................................................175  
Power seats, front ............................................................40  
Memory ........................................................................42  
Memory recalling .......................................................42  
Memory storing ...........................................................42  
Index  
307  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
308  
Remote control .................................................................24  
Battery replacement .................................................270  
Changing batteries ...................................................270  
Operation .....................................................................26  
Synchronizing remote control ................................ 271  
Removable cargo floor plates .......................................129  
Replacement keys ............................................................25  
Replacing bulbs ..............................................................260  
Replacing wiper blade insert .......................................275  
Reporting safety defects ................................................. 16  
Reserve key ................................................................ 24, 25  
Roadside assistance ......................................................... 10  
Roadside assistance call  
Unfastening ..................................................................50  
Warning lamp ........................................................... 223  
Seat belts and integrated restraint system ..................46  
Seat bench .......................................................................120  
Seats, folding (Third row seats) ...................................126  
Seats, front ........................................................................37  
Heated seats .................................................................44  
Manual seats ................................................................39  
Power seats ..................................................................40  
Service indicator  
See Flexible service system (FSS) ............................87  
Side marker lamp .......................................................... 264  
Skyview Top ....................................................................109  
Emergency operation .............................................. 273  
Sliding/pop-up roof ........................................................107  
Emergency operation .............................................. 272  
Express opening ........................................................108  
Synchronizing .......................................................... 272  
Snow chains ....................................................................179  
SOS-call  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................148  
Roof rack .........................................................................276  
S
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor and airbag ................................63  
Screwdriver .....................................................................237  
Seat belt warning lamp .................................................223  
Seat belts ...........................................................................46  
Fastening ......................................................................48  
Seat belt nonusage warning system ........................47  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................148  
Space-saver tire  
Air pump ................................................................... 239  
Spare parts service ....................................................... 284  
Spare wheel ................................................................... 242  
Space-saver tire ........................................................ 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special settings (Climate control) ............................... 101  
Split rear seat bench .....................................................120  
Easy entry/exit feature ............................................123  
Rear seat head restraints .........................................124  
SRS indicator lamp ........................................................ 219  
SRS malfunction ..............................................................57  
Start lock-out ....................................................................25  
Starting and turning off the engine ............................164  
Steering lock ...................................................................162  
Steering wheel  
Adjustable ....................................................................70  
Indicator lamp ...........................................................222  
Stop lamp, high mounted .............................................267  
Storage compartments  
Center console ............................................................115  
Compartment under front passenger seat .............116  
Glove box .....................................................................115  
Stowing things in the vehicle ......................................230  
Stranded vehicle ............................................................259  
Sun visors ........................................................................113  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ...........................54  
Synchronizing remote control ..................................... 271  
T
Tachometer ........................................................................82  
Technical data ................................................................ 287  
Electrical system ...................................................... 290  
Main dimensions ......................................................291  
Rims and tires ..................................................288, 289  
Weights ...................................................................... 290  
Tele Aid ............................................................................148  
Emergency calls ........................................................149  
Information ................................................................154  
Initiating an emergency call manually ..................151  
Roadside Assistance .................................................152  
Telephone, general .........................................................139  
Telephones and two-way radios ...................................146  
Telescoping steering column  
Adjusting ......................................................................70  
Indicator lamp .......................................................... 222  
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................147  
Third row seats ...............................................................126  
Tie-down rings, cargo ....................................................132  
Tire inflation pressure ................................................. 250  
Tire traction ....................................................................178  
Index  
309  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
310  
Tires  
Turn signal failure ........................................................... 91  
Turn signal lamp, side .................................................. 266  
Turn signals ......................................................................90  
Driving instructions .................................................177  
Rims and tires ...........................................................288  
Rotating wheels .........................................................241  
Tire inflation pressure .............................................250  
Tire replacement .......................................................240  
Winter driving instructions ....................................180  
Tow-away alarm ................................................................36  
Switching off ................................................................36  
Towing the vehicle .........................................................255  
Stranded vehicle .......................................................259  
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking 259  
Trailer operation ............................................................198  
Trailer towing ................................................................. 190  
Transmission ..................................................................165  
Transmission control - LOW RANGE mode ...............209  
Transmission fluid level ...............................................234  
Transmission selector lever, manually unlocking ....259  
Traveling abroad ............................................................182  
Trip computer ...................................................................83  
Trip odometer ...................................................................80  
Trunk .................................................................................34  
Opening ........................................................................28  
Trunk lamp ......................................................................111  
U
Unlocking the vehicle ......................................................27  
V
Vanity mirrors ................................................................ 113  
Vehicle jack .................................................................... 237  
Vehicle keys ......................................................................24  
Vehicle tools  
Screwdriver ............................................................... 237  
W
Warranty coverage ........................................................ 284  
Washing the vehicle ..................................................... 280  
What you should know at the gas station ..................212  
Wheel bolt wrench ........................................................ 237  
Wheels ............................................................................ 240  
Changing wheels ...................................................... 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light alloy wheels .....................................................281  
Rims and tires ...........................................................288  
Where to find it ................................................................ 14  
Window wiper/washer, rear ..........................................96  
Windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system  
Refilling ......................................................................236  
Windshield wiper/washer switch .................................95  
Winter driving ................................................................ 181  
Winter driving instructions .........................................180  
Wiper blade  
Replacing ....................................................................275  
Index  
311  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service and Literature  
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts  
to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center.  
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.  
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-sites www.mbusa.com and www.mbusi.com.  
Warning!  
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper  
or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its  
equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.  
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Light Truck Center.  
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this  
Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior  
authorization in writing.  
Title illustration no. P00.00-3059-26  
Press time 10/31/00  
MBNA/TI  
Printed in the U.S.A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order No. 6515 6246 13 Part No. 163 584 28 83 USA Edition B 2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Legacy Car Audio Cassette Player LR 203FX User Manual
Lennox Hearth Printer 4650EN User Manual
Lowrance electronic Marine GPS System ELITE 4X User Manual
Marshall electronic Camera Lens V ZPL06 User Manual
Martin Audio Portable Speaker AQ15 User Manual
MartinLogan Work Light MAC 500 E User Manual
Mattel Motorized Toy Car R1199 0920 User Manual
Maytag Clothes Dryer W10239302C User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower EDITION 1 R MFG ID NO 96141016200 User Manual
Mercedes Benz Automobile Accessories ECP M MERCEDES User Manual